groff
gtroff
Reference
gtroff
InternalsNext: Introduction, Previous: (dir), Up: (dir) [Contents][Index]
• Introduction: | ||
• Invoking groff: | ||
• Tutorial for Macro Users: | ||
• Macro Packages: | ||
• gtroff Reference: | ||
• Preprocessors: | ||
• Output Devices: | ||
• File formats: | ||
• Installation: | ||
• Copying This Manual: | ||
• Request Index: | ||
• Escape Index: | ||
• Operator Index: | ||
• Register Index: | ||
• Macro Index: | ||
• String Index: | ||
• Glyph Name Index: | ||
• Font File Keyword Index: | ||
• Program and File Index: | ||
• Concept Index: |
This manual documents GNU troff
version 1.22.4.
Copyright © 1994–2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being “A GNU Manual,” and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License.”
(a) The FSF’s Back-Cover Text is: “You have the freedom to copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.”
Next: Invoking groff, Previous: Top, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
GNU troff
(or groff
) is a system for typesetting
documents. troff
is very flexible and has been used extensively
for some thirty years. It is well entrenched in the Unix community.
• What Is groff?: | ||
• History: | ||
• groff Capabilities: | ||
• Macro Package Intro: | ||
• Preprocessor Intro: | ||
• Output device intro: | ||
• Credits: |
Next: History, Previous: Introduction, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
groff
?groff
belongs to an older generation of document preparation
systems, which operate more like compilers than the more recent
interactive WYSIWYG1
systems. groff
and its contemporary counterpart, TeX, both
work using a batch paradigm: The input (or source) files are
normal text files with embedded formatting commands. These files can
then be processed by groff
to produce a typeset document on a
variety of devices.
groff
should not be confused with a word processor, an
integrated system of editor and text formatter. Also, many word
processors follow the WYSIWYG paradigm discussed earlier.
Although WYSIWYG systems may be easier to use, they have a
number of disadvantages compared to troff
:
troff
is firmly entrenched in all Unix systems.
“GUIs normally make it simple to accomplish simple actions and impossible to accomplish complex actions.” –Doug Gwyn (22/Jun/91 in
comp.unix.wizards
)
Next: groff Capabilities, Previous: What Is groff?, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
troff
can trace its origins back to a formatting program called
RUNOFF
, written by Jerry Saltzer, which ran on the CTSS
(Compatible Time Sharing System, a project of MIT, the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology) in the
mid-sixties.2 The name came from the use of the phrase “run off a
document”, meaning to print it out.
Bob Morris ported it to the 635 architecture and called the program
roff
(an abbreviation of runoff
). It was rewritten as
rf
for the PDP-7 (before having Unix), and at the
same time (1969), Doug McIlroy rewrote an extended and simplified
version of roff
in the BCPL programming language.
In 1971, the Unix developers wanted to get a PDP-11, and to justify
the cost, proposed the development of a document formatting system for
the AT&T patents division. This first formatting program was
a reimplementation of McIlroy’s roff
, written by J. F.
Ossanna.
When they needed a more flexible language, a new version of roff
called nroff
(“Newer roff
”) was written. It had a much
more complicated syntax, but provided the basis for all future versions.
When they got a Graphic Systems CAT Phototypesetter, Ossanna wrote a
version of nroff
that would drive it. It was dubbed
troff
, for “typesetter roff
”, although many people have
speculated that it actually means “Times roff
” because of the
use of the Times font family in troff
by default. As such, the
name troff
is pronounced ‘t-roff’ rather than ‘trough’.
With troff
came nroff
(they were actually the same program
except for some ‘#ifdef’s), which was for producing output for line
printers and character terminals. It understood everything troff
did, and ignored the commands that were not applicable (e.g. font
changes).
Since there are several things that cannot be done easily in
troff
, work on several preprocessors began. These programs would
transform certain parts of a document into troff
, which made a
very natural use of pipes in Unix.
The eqn
preprocessor allowed mathematical formulae to be specified
in a much simpler and more intuitive manner. tbl
is a
preprocessor for formatting tables. The refer
preprocessor (and
the similar program, bib
) processes citations in a document
according to a bibliographic database.
Unfortunately, Ossanna’s troff
was written in PDP-11 assembly
language and produced output specifically for the CAT phototypesetter.
He rewrote it in C, although it was now 7000 lines of uncommented
code and still dependent on the CAT. As the CAT became less common, and
was no longer supported by the manufacturer, the need to make it support
other devices became a priority. However, before this could be done,
Ossanna died by a severe heart attack in a hospital while recovering
from a previous one.
So, Brian Kernighan took on the task of rewriting troff
. The
newly rewritten version produced device independent code that was very
easy for postprocessors to read and translate to the appropriate printer
codes. Also, this new version of troff
(called ditroff
for “device independent troff
”) had several extensions, which
included drawing functions.
Due to the additional abilities of the new version of troff
,
several new preprocessors appeared. The pic
preprocessor
provides a wide range of drawing functions. Likewise the ideal
preprocessor did the same, although via a much different paradigm. The
grap
preprocessor took specifications for graphs, but, unlike
other preprocessors, produced pic
code.
James Clark began work on a GNU implementation of ditroff
in
early 1989. The first version, groff
0.3.1, was
released June 1990. groff
included:
ditroff
with many extensions.
soelim
, pic
, tbl
, and eqn
preprocessors.
troff
also eliminated the need for a
separate nroff
program with a postprocessor that would produce
ASCII output.
Also, a front-end was included that could construct the, sometimes painfully long, pipelines required for all the post- and preprocessors.
Development of GNU troff
progressed rapidly, and saw the
additions of a replacement for refer
, an implementation of the
ms and mm macros, and a program to deduce how to format a
document (grog
).
It was declared a stable (i.e. non-beta) package with the release of version 1.04 around November 1991.
Beginning in 1999, groff
has new maintainers (the package
was an orphan for a few years). As a result, new features and programs
like grn
, a preprocessor for gremlin images, and an output device
to produce HTML and XHTML have been added.
Next: Macro Package Intro, Previous: History, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
groff
CapabilitiesSo what exactly is groff
capable of doing? groff
provides
a wide range of low-level text formatting operations. Using these, it
is possible to perform a wide range of formatting tasks, such as
footnotes, table of contents, multiple columns, etc. Here’s a list of
the most important operations supported by groff
:
Next: Preprocessor Intro, Previous: groff Capabilities, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
Since groff
provides such low-level facilities, it can be quite
difficult to use by itself. However, groff
provides a
macro facility to specify how certain routine operations
(e.g. starting paragraphs, printing headers and footers, etc.)
should be done. These macros can be collected together into a
macro package. There are a number of macro packages available;
the most common (and the ones described in this manual) are man,
mdoc, me, ms, and mm.
Next: Output device intro, Previous: Macro Package Intro, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
Although groff
provides most functions needed to format a
document, some operations would be unwieldy (e.g. to draw pictures).
Therefore, programs called preprocessors were written that
understand their own language and produce the necessary groff
operations. These preprocessors are able to differentiate their own
input from the rest of the document via markers.
To use a preprocessor, Unix pipes are used to feed the output from the
preprocessor into groff
. Any number of preprocessors may be used
on a given document; in this case, the preprocessors are linked together
into one pipeline. However, with groff
, the user does not need
to construct the pipe, but only tell groff
what preprocessors to
use.
groff
currently has preprocessors for producing tables
(tbl
), typesetting equations (eqn
), drawing pictures
(pic
and grn
), processing bibliographies
(refer
), and drawing chemical structures (chem
). An
associated program that is useful when dealing with preprocessors is
soelim
.
A free implementation of grap
, a preprocessor for drawing graphs,
can be obtained as an extra package; groff
can use grap
also.
Unique to groff
is the preconv
preprocessor that enables
groff
to handle documents in various input encodings.
There are other preprocessors in existence, but, unfortunately, no free
implementations are available. Among them is a preprocessor for drawing
mathematical pictures (ideal
).
Next: Credits, Previous: Preprocessor Intro, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
groff
actually produces device independent code that may be fed
into a postprocessor to produce output for a particular device.
Currently, groff
has postprocessors for POSTSCRIPT devices,
character terminals, X Windows (for previewing), TeX DVI format,
HP LaserJet 4 and Canon LBP printers (which use CAPSL),
HTML, XHTML, and PDF.
Previous: Output device intro, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
Large portions of this manual were taken from existing documents, most
notably, the manual pages for the groff
package by James Clark,
and Eric Allman’s papers on the me macro package.
The section on the man macro package is partly based on Susan G. Kleinmann’s groff_man manual page written for the Debian GNU/Linux system.
Larry Kollar contributed the section on the ms macro package.
Next: Tutorial for Macro Users, Previous: Introduction, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
groff
This section focuses on how to invoke the groff
front end. This
front end takes care of the details of constructing the pipeline among
the preprocessors, gtroff
and the postprocessor.
It has become a tradition that GNU programs get the prefix ‘g’ to
distinguish it from its original counterparts provided by the host (see
Environment, for more details). Thus, for example, geqn
is
GNU eqn
. On operating systems like GNU/Linux or the Hurd, which
don’t contain proprietary versions of troff
, and on
MS-DOS/MS-Windows, where troff
and associated programs are not
available at all, this prefix is omitted since GNU troff
is the
only used incarnation of troff
. Exception: ‘groff’ is never
replaced by ‘roff’.
In this document, we consequently say ‘gtroff’ when talking about
the GNU troff
program. All other implementations of troff
are called AT&T troff
, which is the common origin of all
troff
derivates (with more or less compatible changes).
Similarly, we say ‘gpic’, ‘geqn’, etc.
• Groff Options: | ||
• Environment: | ||
• Macro Directories: | ||
• Font Directories: | ||
• Paper Size: | ||
• Invocation Examples: |
Next: Environment, Previous: Invoking groff, Up: Invoking groff [Contents][Index]
groff
normally runs the gtroff
program and a
postprocessor appropriate for the selected device. The default device
is ‘ps’ (but it can be changed when groff
is configured and
built). It can optionally preprocess with any of gpic
,
geqn
, gtbl
, ggrn
, grap
, gchem
,
grefer
, gsoelim
, or preconv
.
This section only documents options to the groff
front end. Many
of the arguments to groff
are passed on to gtroff
,
therefore those are also included. Arguments to pre- or postprocessors
can be found in Invoking gpic, Invoking geqn, Invoking gtbl, Invoking ggrn, Invoking grefer, Invoking gchem,
Invoking gsoelim, Invoking preconv, Invoking grotty,
Invoking grops, Invoking gropdf, Invoking grohtml,
Invoking grodvi, Invoking grolj4, Invoking grolbp, and
Invoking gxditview.
The command-line format for groff
is:
groff [ -abceghijklpstvzCEGNRSUVXZ ] [ -dcs ] [ -Darg ] [ -ffam ] [ -Fdir ] [ -Idir ] [ -Karg ] [ -Larg ] [ -mname ] [ -Mdir ] [ -nnum ] [ -olist ] [ -Parg ] [ -rcn ] [ -Tdev ] [ -wname ] [ -Wname ] [ files… ]
The command-line format for gtroff
is as follows.
gtroff [ -abcivzCERU ] [ -dcs ] [ -ffam ] [ -Fdir ] [ -mname ] [ -Mdir ] [ -nnum ] [ -olist ] [ -rcn ] [ -Tname ] [ -wname ] [ -Wname ] [ files… ]
Obviously, many of the options to groff
are actually passed on to
gtroff
.
Options without an argument can be grouped behind a single -. A filename of - denotes the standard input. It is possible to have whitespace between an option and its parameter.
The grog
command can be used to guess the correct groff
command to format a file.
Here’s the description of the command-line options:
Generate an ASCII approximation of the typeset output. The
read-only register .A
is then set to 1. See Built-in Registers. A typical example is
groff -a -man -Tdvi troff.man | less
which shows how lines are broken for the DVI device. Note that this option is rather useless today since graphic output devices are available virtually everywhere.
Print a backtrace with each warning or error message. This backtrace
should help track down the cause of the error. The line numbers given
in the backtrace may not always be correct: gtroff
can get
confused by as
or am
requests while counting line numbers.
Suppress color output.
Enable compatibility mode. See Implementation Differences, for the
list of incompatibilities between groff
and AT&T
troff
.
Define c or name to be a string s. c must be a one-letter name; name can be of arbitrary length. All string assignments happen before loading any macro file (including the start-up file).
Set default input encoding used by preconv
to arg. Implies
-k.
Preprocess with geqn
.
Inhibit all error messages.
Use fam as the default font family. See Font Families.
Search dir for subdirectories devname
(name is the name of the device), for the DESC file, and
for font files before looking in the standard directories (see Font Directories). This option is passed to all pre- and postprocessors
using the GROFF_FONT_PATH
environment variable.
Preprocess with ggrn
.
Preprocess with grap
. Implies -p.
Print a help message.
Read the standard input after all the named input files have been processed.
This option may be used to specify a directory to search for files. It is passed to the following programs:
gsoelim
(see gsoelim for more details);
it also implies groff
’s -s option.
gtroff
; it is used to search files named in the psbb
and
so
requests.
grops
; it is used to search files named in the
\X'ps: import
and \X'ps: file
escapes.
The current directory is always searched first. This option may be specified more than once; the directories are searched in the order specified. No directory search is performed for files specified using an absolute path.
Preprocess with gchem
. Implies -p.
Preprocess with preconv
. This is run before any other
preprocessor. Please refer to preconv
’s manual page for its
behaviour if no -K (or -D) option is specified.
Set input encoding used by preconv to arg. Implies -k.
Send the output to a spooler for printing. The command used for this is
specified by the print
command in the device description file
(see Font Files, for more info). If not present, -l is
ignored.
Pass arg to the spooler. Each argument should be passed with a
separate -L option. Note that groff
does not prepend a
‘-’ to arg before passing it to the postprocessor. If the
print
keyword in the device description file is missing,
-L is ignored.
Read in the file name.tmac. Normally groff
searches
for this in its macro directories. If it isn’t found, it tries
tmac.name (searching in the same directories).
Search directory dir for macro files before the standard directories (see Macro Directories).
Number the first page num.
Don’t allow newlines with eqn
delimiters. This is the same as
the -N option in geqn
.
Output only pages in list, which is a comma-separated list of page
ranges; ‘n’ means print page n,
‘m-n’ means print every page between m
and n, ‘-n’ means print every page up
to n, ‘n-’ means print every page beginning
with n. gtroff
exits after printing the last page in
the list. All the ranges are inclusive on both ends.
Within gtroff
, this information can be extracted with the
‘.P’ register. See Built-in Registers.
If your document restarts page numbering at the beginning of each
chapter, then gtroff
prints the specified page range for each
chapter.
Preprocess with gpic
.
Pass arg to the postprocessor. Each argument should be passed
with a separate -P option. Note that groff
does not
prepend ‘-’ to arg before passing it to the postprocessor.
Set number register c or name to the
value n. c must be a one-letter name; name
can be of arbitrary length. n can be any gtroff
numeric expression. All register assignments happen before loading any
macro file (including the start-up file).
Preprocess with grefer
. No mechanism is provided for passing
arguments to grefer
because most grefer
options have
equivalent commands that can be included in the file. See grefer,
for more details.
Note that gtroff
also accepts a -R option, which is not
accessible via groff
. This option prevents the loading of the
troffrc and troffrc-end files.
Preprocess with gsoelim
.
Safer mode. Pass the -S option to gpic
and disable the
open
, opena
, pso
, sy
, and pi
requests. For security reasons, this is enabled by default.
Preprocess with gtbl
.
Prepare output for device dev. The default device is ‘ps’,
unless changed when groff
was configured and built. The
following are the output devices currently available:
ps
For POSTSCRIPT printers and previewers.
pdf
For PDF viewers or printers.
dvi
For TeX DVI format.
X75
For a 75dpi X11 previewer.
X75-12
For a 75dpi X11 previewer with a 12pt base font in the document.
X100
For a 100dpi X11 previewer.
X100-12
For a 100dpi X11 previewer with a 12pt base font in the document.
ascii
For typewriter-like devices using the (7-bit) ASCII character set.
latin1
For typewriter-like devices that support the Latin-1 (ISO 8859-1) character set.
utf8
For typewriter-like devices that use the Unicode (ISO 10646) character set with UTF-8 encoding.
cp1047
For typewriter-like devices that use the EBCDIC encoding IBM cp1047.
lj4
For HP LaserJet4-compatible (or other PCL5-compatible) printers.
lbp
For Canon CAPSL printers (LBP-4 and LBP-8 series laser printers).
html
xhtml
To produce HTML and XHTML output, respectively.
Note that this driver consists of two parts, a preprocessor
(pre-grohtml
) and a postprocessor (post-grohtml
).
The predefined gtroff
string register .T
contains the
current output device; the read-only number register .T
is set
to 1 if this option is used (which is always true if groff
is used to call gtroff
). See Built-in Registers.
The postprocessor to be used for a device is specified by the
postpro
command in the device description file. (See Font Files, for more info.) This can be overridden with the -X
option.
Unsafe mode. This enables the open
, opena
, pso
,
sy
, and pi
requests.
Enable warning name. Available warnings are described in Debugging. Multiple -w options are allowed.
Inhibit warning name. Multiple -W options are allowed.
Make programs run by groff
print out their version number.
Print the pipeline on stdout
instead of executing it. If
specified more than once, print the pipeline on stderr
and
execute it.
Preview with gxditview
instead of using the usual postprocessor.
This is unlikely to produce good results except with -Tps.
Note that this is not the same as using -TX75 or
-TX100 to view a document with gxditview
: The former
uses the metrics of the specified device, whereas the latter uses
X-specific fonts and metrics.
Suppress output from gtroff
. Only error messages are printed.
Do not postprocess the output of gtroff
. Normally groff
automatically runs the appropriate postprocessor.
Next: Macro Directories, Previous: Groff Options, Up: Invoking groff [Contents][Index]
There are also several environment variables (of the operating system,
not within gtroff
) that can modify the behavior of groff
.
GROFF_BIN_PATH
This search path, followed by PATH
, is used for commands executed
by groff
.
GROFF_COMMAND_PREFIX
If this is set to X, then groff
runs
Xtroff
instead of gtroff
. This also applies to
tbl
, pic
, eqn
, grn
, chem
,
refer
, and soelim
. It does not apply to grops
,
grodvi
, grotty
, pre-grohtml
, post-grohtml
,
preconv
, grolj4
, gropdf
, and gxditview
.
The default command prefix is determined during the installation process. If a non-GNU troff system is found, prefix ‘g’ is used, none otherwise.
GROFF_ENCODING
The value of this environment value is passed to the preconv
preprocessor to select the encoding of input files. Setting this option
implies groff
’s command-line option -k (that is,
groff
actually always calls preconv
). If set without a
value, groff
calls preconv
without arguments. An explicit
-K command-line option overrides the value of
GROFF_ENCODING
. See the manual page of preconv
for details.
GROFF_FONT_PATH
A colon-separated list of directories in which to search for the
dev
name directory (before the default directories are
tried). See Font Directories.
GROFF_TMAC_PATH
A colon-separated list of directories in which to search for macro files (before the default directories are tried). See Macro Directories.
GROFF_TMPDIR
The directory in which groff
creates temporary files. If this is
not set and TMPDIR
is set, temporary files are created in that
directory. Otherwise temporary files are created in a system-dependent
default directory (on Unix and GNU/Linux systems, this is usually
/tmp). grops
, grefer
, pre-grohtml
, and
post-grohtml
can create temporary files in this directory.
GROFF_TYPESETTER
The default output device.
SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH
A timestamp (expressed as seconds since the Unix epoch) to use in place of
the current time when initializing time-based built-in registers such as
\n[seconds]
.
Note that MS-DOS and MS-Windows ports of groff
use semi-colons,
rather than colons, to separate the directories in the lists described
above.
Next: Font Directories, Previous: Environment, Up: Invoking groff [Contents][Index]
All macro file names must be named name.tmac
or
tmac.name
to make the -mname command-line
option work. The mso
request doesn’t have this restriction; any
file name can be used, and gtroff
won’t try to append or prepend
the ‘tmac’ string.
Macro files are kept in the tmac directories, all of which constitute the tmac path. The elements of the search path for macro files are (in that order):
gtroff
’s or groff
’s
-M command-line option.
GROFF_TMAC_PATH
environment variable.
/usr/local/lib/groff/site-tmac /usr/local/share/groff/site-tmac /usr/local/share/groff/1.22.3/tmac
assuming that the version of groff
is 1.22.3, and the
installation prefix was /usr/local. It is possible to fine-tune
those directories during the installation process.
Next: Paper Size, Previous: Macro Directories, Up: Invoking groff [Contents][Index]
Basically, there is no restriction how font files for groff
are
named and how long font names are; however, to make the font family
mechanism work (see Font Families), fonts within a family should
start with the family name, followed by the shape. For example, the
Times family uses ‘T’ for the family name and ‘R’, ‘B’,
‘I’, and ‘BI’ to indicate the shapes ‘roman’, ‘bold’,
‘italic’, and ‘bold italic’, respectively. Thus the final font names
are ‘TR’, ‘TB’, ‘TI’, and ‘TBI’.
All font files are kept in the font directories, which constitute
the font path. The file search functions always append the
directory dev
name, where name is the name of the
output device. Assuming, say, DVI output, and /foo/bar as a font
directory, the font files for grodvi
must be in
/foo/bar/devdvi.
The elements of the search path for font files are (in that order):
gtroff
’s or groff
’s
-F command-line option. All device drivers and some
preprocessors also have this option.
GROFF_FONT_PATH
environment variable.
/usr/local/share/groff/site-font /usr/local/share/groff/1.22.3/font
assuming that the version of groff
is 1.22.3, and the
installation prefix was /usr/local. It is possible to fine-tune
those directories during the installation process.
Next: Invocation Examples, Previous: Font Directories, Up: Invoking groff [Contents][Index]
In groff, the page size for gtroff
and for output devices are
handled separately. See Page Layout, for vertical manipulation of
the page size. See Line Layout, for horizontal changes.
A default paper size can be set in the device’s DESC file. Most
output devices also have a command-line option -p to override
the default paper size and option -l to use landscape
orientation. See DESC File Format, for a description of the
papersize
keyword, which takes the same argument as -p.
A convenient shorthand to set a particular paper size for gtroff
is command-line option -dpaper=size. This defines string
paper
, which is processed in file papersize.tmac (loaded in
the start-up file troffrc by default). Possible values for
size are the same as the predefined values for the
papersize
keyword (but only in lowercase) except
a7
–d7
. An appended ‘l’ (ell) character denotes
landscape orientation.
For example, use the following for PS output on A4 paper in landscape orientation:
groff -Tps -dpaper=a4l -P-pa4 -P-l -ms foo.ms > foo.ps
Note that it is up to the particular macro package to respect default page dimensions set in this way (most do).
Previous: Paper Size, Up: Invoking groff [Contents][Index]
This section lists several common uses of groff
and the
corresponding command lines.
groff file
This command processes file without a macro package or a
preprocessor. The output device is the default, ‘ps’, and the
output is sent to stdout
.
groff -t -mandoc -Tascii file | less
This is basically what a call to the man
program does.
gtroff
processes the manual page file with the
mandoc macro file (which in turn either calls the man or
the mdoc macro package), using the tbl
preprocessor and
the ASCII output device. Finally, the less
pager
displays the result.
groff -X -m me file
Preview file with gxditview
, using the me macro
package. Since no -T option is specified, use the default
device (‘ps’). Note that you can either say ‘-m me’ or
‘-me’; the latter is an anachronism from the early days of
Unix.3
groff -man -rD1 -z file
Check file with the man macro package, forcing double-sided printing – don’t produce any output.
• grog: |
Previous: Invocation Examples, Up: Invocation Examples [Contents][Index]
grog
grog
reads files, guesses which of the groff
preprocessors
and/or macro packages are required for formatting them, and prints the
groff
command including those options on the standard output. It
generates one or more of the options -e, -man,
-me, -mm, -mom, -ms, -mdoc,
-mdoc-old, -p, -R, -g, -G,
-s, and -t.
A special file name - refers to the standard input. Specifying no files also means to read the standard input. Any specified options are included in the printed command. No space is allowed between options and their arguments. The only options recognized are -C (which is also passed on) to enable compatibility mode, and -v to print the version number and exit.
For example,
grog -Tdvi paper.ms
guesses the appropriate command to print paper.ms and then prints
it to the command line after adding the -Tdvi option. For
direct execution, enclose the call to grog
in backquotes at the
Unix shell prompt:
`grog -Tdvi paper.ms` > paper.dvi
As seen in the example, it is still necessary to redirect the output to
something meaningful (i.e. either a file or a pager program like
less
).
Next: Macro Packages, Previous: Invoking groff, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Most users tend to use a macro package to format their papers. This
means that the whole breadth of groff
is not necessary for most
people. This chapter covers the material needed to efficiently use a
macro package.
• Basics: | ||
• Common Features: |
Next: Common Features, Previous: Tutorial for Macro Users, Up: Tutorial for Macro Users [Contents][Index]
This section covers some of the basic concepts necessary to understand how to use a macro package.4 References are made throughout to more detailed information, if desired.
gtroff
reads an input file prepared by the user and outputs a
formatted document suitable for publication or framing. The input
consists of text, or words to be printed, and embedded commands
(requests and escapes), which tell gtroff
how to
format the output. For more detail on this, see Embedded Commands.
The word argument is used in this chapter to mean a word or number that appears on the same line as a request, and which modifies the meaning of that request. For example, the request
.sp
spaces one line, but
.sp 4
spaces four lines. The number 4 is an argument to the sp
request, which says to space four lines instead of one. Arguments are
separated from the request and from each other by spaces (no
tabs). More details on this can be found in Request and Macro Arguments.
The primary function of gtroff
is to collect words from input
lines, fill output lines with those words, justify the right-hand margin
by inserting extra spaces in the line, and output the result. For
example, the input:
Now is the time for all good men to come to the aid of their party. Four score and seven years ago, etc.
is read, packed onto output lines, and justified to produce:
Now is the time for all good men to come to the aid of their party. Four score and seven years ago, etc.
Sometimes a new output line should be started even though the current line is not yet full; for example, at the end of a paragraph. To do this it is possible to cause a break, which starts a new output line. Some requests cause a break automatically, as normally do blank input lines and input lines beginning with a space.
Not all input lines are text to be formatted. Some input lines are requests that describe how to format the text. Requests always have a period (‘.’) or an apostrophe (‘'’) as the first character of the input line.
The text formatter also does more complex things, such as automatically numbering pages, skipping over page boundaries, putting footnotes in the correct place, and so forth.
Here are a few hints for preparing text for input to gtroff
.
gtroff
packs words onto longer lines anyhow.
gtroff
recognizes characters that usually end a
sentence, and inserts sentence space accordingly.
gtroff
is smart
enough to hyphenate words as needed, but is not smart enough to take
hyphens out and join a word back together. Also, words such as
“mother-in-law” should not be broken over a line, since then a space
can occur where not wanted, such as “mother- in-law”.
gtroff
double-spaces output text automatically if you use the
request ‘.ls 2’. Reactivate single-spaced mode by typing
‘.ls 1’.5
A number of requests allow to change the way the output looks, sometimes called the layout of the output page. Most of these requests adjust the placing of whitespace (blank lines or spaces).
The bp
request starts a new page, causing a line break.
The request ‘.sp N’ leaves N lines of blank space. N can be omitted (meaning skip a single line) or can be of the form Ni (for N inches) or Nc (for N centimeters). For example, the input:
.sp 1.5i My thoughts on the subject .sp
leaves one and a half inches of space, followed by the line “My thoughts on the subject”, followed by a single blank line (more measurement units are available, see Measurements).
Text lines can be centered by using the ce
request. The line
after ce
is centered (horizontally) on the page. To center more
than one line, use ‘.ce N’ (where N is the number
of lines to center), followed by the N lines. To center many
lines without counting them, type:
.ce 1000 lines to center .ce 0
The ‘.ce 0’ request tells groff
to center zero more
lines, in other words, stop centering.
All of these requests cause a break; that is, they always start a new
line. To start a new line without performing any other action, use
br
.
Previous: Basics, Up: Tutorial for Macro Users [Contents][Index]
gtroff
provides very low-level operations for formatting a
document. There are many common routine operations that are done in
all documents. These common operations are written into macros
and collected into a macro package.
All macro packages provide certain common capabilities that fall into the following categories.
Next: Sections and Chapters, Previous: Common Features, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
One of the most common and most used capability is starting a paragraph. There are a number of different types of paragraphs, any of which can be initiated with macros supplied by the macro package. Normally, paragraphs start with a blank line and the first line indented, like the text in this manual. There are also block style paragraphs, which omit the indentation:
Some men look at constitutions with sanctimonious reverence, and deem them like the ark of the covenant, too sacred to be touched.
And there are also indented paragraphs, which begin with a tag or label at the margin and the remaining text indented.
one This is the first paragraph. Notice how the first line of the resulting paragraph lines up with the other lines in the paragraph.
longlabel This paragraph had a long label. The first character of text on the first line does not line up with the text on second and subsequent lines, although they line up with each other.
A variation of this is a bulleted list.
. Bulleted lists start with a bullet. It is possible to use other glyphs instead of the bullet. In nroff mode using the ASCII character set for output, a dot is used instead of a real bullet.
Next: Headers and Footers, Previous: Paragraphs, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
Most macro packages supply some form of section headers. The simplest kind is simply the heading on a line by itself in bold type. Others supply automatically numbered section heading or different heading styles at different levels. Some, more sophisticated, macro packages supply macros for starting chapters and appendices.
Next: Page Layout Adjustment, Previous: Sections and Chapters, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
Every macro package gives some way to manipulate the headers and footers (also called titles) on each page. This is text put at the top and bottom of each page, respectively, which contain data like the current page number, the current chapter title, and so on. Its appearance is not affected by the running text. Some packages allow for different ones on the even and odd pages (for material printed in a book form).
The titles are called three-part titles, that is, there is a left-justified part, a centered part, and a right-justified part. An automatically generated page number may be put in any of these fields with the ‘%’ character (see Page Layout, for more details).
Next: Displays, Previous: Headers and Footers, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
Most macro packages let the user specify top and bottom margins and other details about the appearance of the printed pages.
Next: Footnotes and Annotations, Previous: Page Layout Adjustment, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
Displays are sections of text to be set off from the body of the paper. Major quotes, tables, and figures are types of displays, as are all the examples used in this document.
Major quotes are quotes that are several lines long, and hence are set in from the rest of the text without quote marks around them.
A list is an indented, single-spaced, unfilled display. Lists should be used when the material to be printed should not be filled and justified like normal text, such as columns of figures or the examples used in this paper.
A keep is a display of lines that are kept on a single page if possible. An example for a keep might be a diagram. Keeps differ from lists in that lists may be broken over a page boundary whereas keeps are not.
Floating keeps move relative to the text. Hence, they are good for things that are referred to by name, such as “See figure 3”. A floating keep appears at the bottom of the current page if it fits; otherwise, it appears at the top of the next page. Meanwhile, the surrounding text ‘flows’ around the keep, thus leaving no blank areas.
Next: Table of Contents, Previous: Displays, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
There are a number of requests to save text for later printing.
Footnotes are printed at the bottom of the current page.
Delayed text is very similar to a footnote except that it is printed when called for explicitly. This allows a list of references to appear (for example) at the end of each chapter, as is the convention in some disciplines.
Most macro packages that supply this functionality also supply a means of automatically numbering either type of annotation.
Next: Indices, Previous: Footnotes and Annotations, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
Tables of contents are a type of delayed text having a tag (usually the page number) attached to each entry after a row of dots. The table accumulates throughout the paper until printed, usually after the paper has ended. Many macro packages provide the ability to have several tables of contents (e.g. a standard table of contents, a list of tables, etc).
Next: Paper Formats, Previous: Table of Contents, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
While some macro packages use the term index, none actually provide that functionality. The facilities they call indices are actually more appropriate for tables of contents.
To produce a real index in a document, external tools like the
makeindex
program are necessary.
Next: Multiple Columns, Previous: Indices, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
Some macro packages provide stock formats for various kinds of documents. Many of them provide a common format for the title and opening pages of a technical paper. The mm macros in particular provide formats for letters and memoranda.
Next: Font and Size Changes, Previous: Paper Formats, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
Some macro packages (but not man) provide the ability to have two or more columns on a page.
Next: Predefined Strings, Previous: Multiple Columns, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
The built-in font and size functions are not always intuitive, so all macro packages provide macros to make these operations simpler.
Next: Preprocessor Support, Previous: Font and Size Changes, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
Most macro packages provide various predefined strings for a variety of uses; examples are sub- and superscripts, printable dates, quotes and various special characters.
Next: Configuration and Customization, Previous: Predefined Strings, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
All macro packages provide support for various preprocessors and may extend their functionality.
For example, all macro packages mark tables (which are processed with
gtbl
) by placing them between TS
and TE
macros.
The ms macro package has an option, ‘.TS H’, that
prints a caption at the top of a new page (when the table is too long to
fit on a single page).
Previous: Preprocessor Support, Up: Common Features [Contents][Index]
Some macro packages provide means of customizing many of the details of how the package behaves. This ranges from setting the default type size to changing the appearance of section headers.
Next: gtroff Reference, Previous: Tutorial for Macro Users, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
This chapter documents the main macro packages that come with
groff
.
Different main macro packages can’t be used at the same time; for example
groff -m man foo.man -m ms bar.doc
doesn’t work. Note that option arguments are processed before non-option arguments; the above (failing) sample is thus reordered to
groff -m man -m ms foo.man bar.doc
• man: | ||
• mdoc: | ||
• ms: | ||
• me: | ||
• mm: | ||
• mom: |
Next: mdoc, Previous: Macro Packages, Up: Macro Packages [Contents][Index]
This is the most popular and probably the most important macro package
of groff
. It is easy to use, and a vast majority of manual pages
are based on it.
• Man options: | ||
• Man usage: | ||
• Man font macros: | ||
• Miscellaneous man macros: | ||
• Predefined man strings: | ||
• Preprocessors in man pages: | ||
• Optional man extensions: |
The command-line format for using the man macros with
groff
is:
groff -m man [ -rLL=length ] [ -rLT=length ] [ -rFT=dist ] [ -rcR=1 ] [ -rC1 ] [ -rD1 ] [-rHY=flags ] [ -rPnnn ] [ -rSxx ] [ -rXnnn ] [ -rIN=length ] [ -rSN=length ] [ files… ]
It is possible to use ‘-man’ instead of ‘-m man’.
-rcR=1
This option (the default if a TTY output device is used) creates a
single, very long page instead of multiple pages. Use -rcR=0
to
disable it.
-rC1
If more than one manual page is given on the command line, number the pages continuously, rather than starting each at 1.
-rD1
Double-sided printing. Footers for even and odd pages are formatted differently.
-rFT=dist
Set the position of the footer text to dist. If positive, the distance is measured relative to the top of the page, otherwise it is relative to the bottom. The default is -0.5i.
-rHY=flags
Set hyphenation flags. Possible values are 1 to hyphenate without restrictions, 2 to not hyphenate the last word on a page, 4 to not hyphenate the last two characters of a word, and 8 to not hyphenate the first two characters of a word. These values are additive; the default is 8.
-rIN=length
Set the body text indentation to length. If not specified, the indentation defaults to 7n (7 characters) in nroff mode and 7.2n otherwise. For nroff, this value should always be an integer multiple of unit ‘n’ to get consistent indentation.
-rLL=length
Set line length to length. If not specified, the line length is set to respect any value set by a prior ‘ll’ request (which must be in effect when the ‘TH’ macro is invoked), if this differs from the built-in default for the formatter; otherwise it defaults to 78n in nroff mode (this is 78 characters per line) and 6.5i in troff mode.6
-rLT=length
Set title length to length. If not specified, the title length defaults to the line length.
-rPnnn
Page numbering starts with nnn rather than with 1.
-rSxx
Use xx (which can be 10, 11, or 12pt) as the base document font size instead of the default value of 10pt.
-rSN=length
Set the indentation for sub-subheadings to length. If not specified, the indentation defaults to 3n.
-rXnnn
After page nnn, number pages as nnna, nnnb, nnnc, etc. For example, the option -rX2 produces the following page numbers: 1, 2, 2a, 2b, 2c, etc.
Next: Man font macros, Previous: Man options, Up: man [Contents][Index]
This section describes the available macros for manual pages. For further customization, put additional macros and requests into the file man.local, which is loaded immediately after the man package.
Set the title of the man page to title and the section to section, which must have a value between 1 and 8. The value of section may also have a string appended, e.g. ‘.pm’, to indicate a specific subsection of the man pages.
Both title and section are positioned at the left and right in the header line (with section in parentheses immediately appended to title. extra1 is positioned in the middle of the footer line. extra2 is positioned at the left in the footer line (or at the left on even pages and at the right on odd pages if double-sided printing is active). extra3 is centered in the header line.
For HTML and XHTML output, headers and footers are completely suppressed.
Additionally, this macro starts a new page; the new line number
is 1 again (except if the -rC1 option is given on the
command line) – this feature is intended only for formatting multiple
man pages; a single man page should contain exactly one TH
macro
at the beginning of the file.
Set up an unnumbered section heading sticking out to the left. Prints
out all the text following SH
up to the end of the line (or the
text in the next line if there is no argument to SH
) in bold face
(or the font specified by the string HF
), one size larger than
the base document size. Additionally, the left margin and the
indentation for the following text is reset to its default value.
Set up an unnumbered (sub)section heading. Prints out all the text
following SS
up to the end of the line (or the text in the next
line if there is no argument to SS
) in bold face (or the font
specified by the string HF
), at the same size as the base
document size. Additionally, the left margin and the indentation for
the following text is reset to its default value.
Set up an indented paragraph with label. The indentation is set to
nnn if that argument is supplied (the default unit is ‘n’ if
omitted), otherwise it is set to the previous indentation value
specified with TP
, IP
, or HP
(or to the default
value if none of them have been used yet).
The first line of text following this macro is interpreted as a string to be printed flush-left, as it is appropriate for a label. It is not interpreted as part of a paragraph, so there is no attempt to fill the first line with text from the following input lines. Nevertheless, if the label is not as wide as the indentation the paragraph starts at the same line (but indented), continuing on the following lines. If the label is wider than the indentation the descriptive part of the paragraph begins on the line following the label, entirely indented. Note that neither font shape nor font size of the label is set to a default value; on the other hand, the rest of the text has default font settings.
These macros are mutual aliases. Any of them causes a line break at the
current position, followed by a vertical space downwards by the amount
specified by the PD
macro. The font size and shape are reset to
the default value (10pt roman if no -rS option is given
on the command line). Finally, the current left margin and the
indentation is restored.
Set up an indented paragraph, using designator as a tag to mark
its beginning. The indentation is set to nnn if that argument is
supplied (default unit is ‘n’), otherwise it is set to the previous
indentation value specified with TP
, IP
, or HP
(or
the default value if none of them have been used yet). Font size and
face of the paragraph (but not the designator) are reset to their
default values.
To start an indented paragraph with a particular indentation but without
a designator, use ‘""’ (two double quotes) as the first argument of
IP
.
For example, to start a paragraph with bullets as the designator and 4 en indentation, write
.IP \(bu 4
Set up a paragraph with hanging left indentation. The indentation is
set to nnn if that argument is supplied (default unit is
‘n’), otherwise it is set to the previous indentation value
specified with TP
, IP
, or HP
(or the default value
if non of them have been used yet). Font size and face are reset to
their default values.
Move the left margin to the right by the value nnn if specified
(default unit is ‘n’); otherwise it is set to the previous
indentation value specified with TP
, IP
, or HP
(or
to the default value if none of them have been used yet). The
indentation value is then set to the default.
Calls to the RS
macro can be nested.
Move the left margin back to level nnn, restoring the previous
left margin. If no argument is given, it moves one level back. The
first level (i.e., no call to RS
yet) has number 1, and each
call to RS
increases the level by 1.
To summarize, the following macros cause a line break with the insertion
of vertical space (which amount can be changed with the PD
macro): SH
, SS
, TP
, LP
(PP
,
P
), IP
, and HP
.
The macros RS
and RE
also cause a break but do not insert
vertical space.
Finally, the macros SH
, SS
, LP
(PP
,
P
), and RS
reset the indentation to its default value.
Next: Miscellaneous man macros, Previous: Man usage, Up: man [Contents][Index]
The standard font is roman; the default text size is 10 points. If command-line option -rS=n is given, use n points as the default text size.
Set the text on the same line or the text on the next line in a font that is one point size smaller than the default font.
Set the text on the same line or the text on the next line in bold face font, one point size smaller than the default font.
Set its arguments alternately in bold face and italic, without a space between the arguments. Thus,
.BI this "word and" that
produces “thisword andthat” with “this” and “that” in bold face, and “word and” in italics.
Set its arguments alternately in italic and bold face, without a space between the arguments.
Set its arguments alternately in roman and italic, without a space between the arguments.
Set its arguments alternately in italic and roman, without a space between the arguments.
Set its arguments alternately in bold face and roman, without a space between the arguments.
Set its arguments alternately in roman and bold face, without a space between the arguments.
Set text in bold face. If no text is present on the line where the macro is called, then the text of the next line appears in bold face.
Set text in italic. If no text is present on the line where the macro is called, then the text of the next line appears in italic.
Next: Predefined man strings, Previous: Man font macros, Up: man [Contents][Index]
The default indentation is 7.2n in troff mode and 7n in
nroff mode except for grohtml
, which ignores indentation.
Set tabs every 0.5 inches. Since this macro is always executed
during a call to the TH
macro, it makes sense to call it only if
the tab positions have been changed.
Adjust the empty space before a new paragraph (or section). The optional argument gives the amount of space (default unit is ‘v’); without parameter, the value is reset to its default value (1 line in nroff mode, 0.4v otherwise).
This affects the macros SH
, SS
, TP
, LP
(as
well as PP
and P
), IP
, and HP
.
The following two macros are included for BSD compatibility.
Alter the footer for use with AT&T manpages. This command exists only for compatibility; don’t use it. The first argument system can be:
3
7th Edition (the default)
4
System III
5
System V
An optional second argument release to AT
specifies the
release number (such as “System V Release 3”).
Alters the footer for use with BSD manpages. This command exists only for compatibility; don’t use it. The argument can be:
3
3rd Berkeley Distribution (the default)
4
4th Berkeley Distribution
5
4.2 Berkeley Distribution
6
4.3 Berkeley Distribution
7
4.4 Berkeley Distribution
Next: Preprocessors in man pages, Previous: Miscellaneous man macros, Up: man [Contents][Index]
The following strings are defined:
Switch back to the default font size.
The typeface used for headings. The default is ‘B’.
The ‘registered’ sign.
The ‘trademark’ sign.
Left and right quote. This is equal to \(lq
and \(rq
,
respectively.
Next: Optional man extensions, Previous: Predefined man strings, Up: man [Contents][Index]
If a preprocessor like gtbl
or geqn
is needed, it has
become common usage to make the first line of the man page look like
this:
'\" word
Note the single space character after the double quote. word
consists of letters for the needed preprocessors: ‘e’ for
geqn
, ‘r’ for grefer
, ‘t’ for gtbl
.
Modern implementations of the man
program read this first line
and automatically call the right preprocessor(s).
Previous: Preprocessors in man pages, Up: man [Contents][Index]
Use the file man.local for local extensions to the man
macros or for style changes.
In groff versions 1.18.2 and later, you can specify custom headers and footers by redefining the following macros in man.local.
Control the content of the headers. Normally, the header prints the
command name and section number on either side, and the optional fifth
argument to TH
in the center.
Control the content of the footers. Normally, the footer prints the
page number and the third and fourth arguments to TH
.
Use the FT
number register to specify the footer position. The
default is -0.5i.
The groff
source distribution includes a file named
man.ultrix, containing macros compatible with the Ultrix variant
of man
. Copy this file into man.local (or use the
mso
request to load it) to enable the following macros.
Print ‘<CTRL/key>’.
Print subsequent text using the constant width (Courier) typeface.
Begin a non-filled display.
End a non-filled display started with Ds
.
Begin a non-filled display using the constant width (Courier) typeface. Use the optional indent argument to indent the display.
End a non-filled display started with EX
.
Set text in Helvetica. If no text is present on the line where the macro is called, then the text of the next line appears in Helvetica.
Set text in Helvetica Oblique. If no text is present on the line where the macro is called, then the text of the next line appears in Helvetica Oblique.
Set text in Helvetica Bold. If no text is present on the line
where the macro is called, then all text up to the next HB
appears in Helvetica Bold.
Identical to HB
.
Set a manpage reference in Ultrix format. The title is in Courier instead of italic. Optional punctuation follows the section number without an intervening space.
C
] [title]Begin a note. Print the optional title, or the word “Note”,
centered on the page. Text following the macro makes up the body of the
note, and is indented on both sides. If the first argument is C
,
the body of the note is printed centered (the second argument replaces
the word “Note” if specified).
End a note begun with NT
.
Set the path name in constant width (Courier), followed by optional punctuation.
If called with two arguments, identical to PN
. If called with
three arguments, set the second argument in constant width (Courier),
bracketed by the first and third arguments in the current font.
Switch to roman font and turn off any underlining in effect.
Print the string ‘<RETURN>’.
4
]Start printing a change bar in the margin if the number 4
is
specified. Otherwise, this macro does nothing.
End printing the change bar begun by VS
.
The following example man.local file alters the SH
macro
to add some extra vertical space before printing the heading. Headings
are printed in Helvetica Bold.
.\" Make the heading fonts Helvetica .ds HF HB . .\" Put more whitespace in front of headings. .rn SH SH-orig .de SH . if t .sp (u;\\n[PD]*2) . SH-orig \\$* ..
Next: ms, Previous: man, Up: Macro Packages [Contents][Index]
See the groff_mdoc(7) man page (type man groff_mdoc
at the command line).
Next: me, Previous: mdoc, Up: Macro Packages [Contents][Index]
The -ms macros are suitable for reports, letters, books, user manuals, and so forth. The package provides macros for cover pages, section headings, paragraphs, lists, footnotes, pagination, and a table of contents.
• ms Intro: | ||
• General ms Structure: | ||
• ms Document Control Registers: | ||
• ms Cover Page Macros: | ||
• ms Body Text: | ||
• ms Page Layout: | ||
• Differences from AT&T ms: | ||
• Naming Conventions: |
Next: General ms Structure, Previous: ms, Up: ms [Contents][Index]
The original -ms macros were included with AT&T
troff
as well as the man macros. While the man
package is intended for brief documents that can be read on-line as well
as printed, the ms macros are suitable for longer documents that
are meant to be printed rather than read on-line.
The ms macro package included with groff
is a complete,
bottom-up re-implementation. Several macros (specific to AT&T
or Berkeley) are not included, while several new commands are.
See Differences from AT&T ms, for more information.
Next: ms Document Control Registers, Previous: ms Intro, Up: ms [Contents][Index]
The ms macro package expects a certain amount of structure, but not as much as packages such as man or mdoc.
The simplest documents can begin with a paragraph macro (such as
LP
or PP
), and consist of text separated by paragraph
macros or even blank lines. Longer documents have a structure as
follows:
If you invoke the RP
(report) macro on the first line of the
document, groff
prints the cover page information on its own
page; otherwise it prints the information on the first page with your
document text immediately following. Other document formats found in
AT&T troff
are specific to AT&T or Berkeley,
and are not supported in groff
.
By setting number registers, you can change your document’s type (font and size), margins, spacing, headers and footers, and footnotes. See ms Document Control Registers, for more details.
A cover page consists of a title, the author’s name and institution, an abstract, and the date.7 See ms Cover Page Macros, for more details.
Following the cover page is your document. You can use the ms macros to write reports, letters, books, and so forth. The package is designed for structured documents, consisting of paragraphs interspersed with headings and augmented by lists, footnotes, tables, and other common constructs. See ms Body Text, for more details.
Longer documents usually include a table of contents, which you can
invoke by placing the TC
macro at the end of your document. The
ms macros have minimal indexing facilities, consisting of the
IX
macro, which prints an entry on standard error. Printing the
table of contents at the end is necessary since groff
is a
single-pass text formatter, thus it cannot determine the page number of
each section until that section has actually been set and printed.
Since ms output is intended for hardcopy, you can manually
relocate the pages containing the table of contents between the cover
page and the body text after printing.
Next: ms Cover Page Macros, Previous: General ms Structure, Up: ms [Contents][Index]
The following is a list of document control number registers. For the
sake of consistency, set registers related to margins at the beginning
of your document, or just after the RP
macro. You can set other
registers later in your document, but you should keep them together at
the beginning to make them easy to find and edit as necessary.
Defines the page offset (i.e., the left margin). There is no explicit
right margin setting; the combination of the PO
and LL
registers implicitly define the right margin width.
Effective: next page.
Default value: 1i.
Defines the line length (i.e., the width of the body text).
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: 6i.
Defines the title length (i.e., the header and footer width). This
is usually the same as LL
, but not necessarily.
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: 6i.
Defines the header margin height at the top of the page.
Effective: next page.
Default: 1i.
Defines the footer margin height at the bottom of the page.
Effective: next page.
Default: 1i.
Defines the point size of the body text. If the value is larger than or equal to 1000, divide it by 1000 to get a fractional point size. For example, ‘.nr PS 10250’ sets the document’s point size to 10.25p.
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: 10p.
Defines the space between lines (line height plus leading). If the
value is larger than or equal to 1000, divide it by 1000 to get a
fractional point size. Due to backwards compatibility, VS
must
be smaller than 40000 (this is 40.0p).
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: 12p.
Defines an increment in point size, which is applied to section headings
at nesting levels below the value specified in GROWPS
. The value
of PSINCR
should be specified in points, with the p scaling
factor, and may include a fractional component; for example,
‘.nr PSINCR 1.5p’ sets a point size increment of 1.5p.
Effective: next section heading.
Default: 1p.
Defines the heading level below which the point size increment set by
PSINCR
becomes effective. Section headings at and above the
level specified by GROWPS
are printed at the point size set by
PS
; for each level below the value of GROWPS
, the point
size is increased in steps equal to the value of PSINCR
. Setting
GROWPS
to any value less than 2 disables the incremental
heading size feature.
Effective: next section heading.
Default: 0.
Defines the hyphenation level. HY
sets safely the value of the
low-level hy
register. Setting the value of HY
to 0
is equivalent to using the nh
request.
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: 6.
Defines the font family used to typeset the document.
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: as defined in the output device.
Defines the initial indentation of a (PP
macro) paragraph.
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: 5n.
Defines the space between paragraphs.
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: 0.3v.
Defines the indentation on both sides of a quoted (QP
,
QS
, and QE
macros)
paragraph.
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: 5n.
Defines the minimum number of initial lines of any paragraph that
should be kept together, to avoid orphan lines at the bottom of a page.
If a new paragraph is started close to the bottom of a page, and there
is insufficient space to accommodate PORPHANS
lines before an
automatic page break, then the page break is forced, before the start of
the paragraph.
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: 1.
Defines the minimum number of lines of the following paragraph that
should be kept together with any section heading introduced by the
NH
or SH
macros. If a section heading is placed close to
the bottom of a page, and there is insufficient space to accommodate
both the heading and at least HORPHANS
lines of the following
paragraph, before an automatic page break, then the page break is forced
before the heading.
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: 1.
Defines the length of a footnote.
Effective: next footnote.
Default: \n[LL]
* 5 / 6.
Defines the footnote indentation.
Effective: next footnote.
Default: 2n.
The footnote format:
0
Print the footnote number as a superscript; indent the footnote (default).
1
Print the number followed by a period (like 1.) and indent the footnote.
2
Like 1, without an indentation.
3
Like 1, but print the footnote number as a hanging paragraph.
Effective: next footnote.
Default: 0.
Defines the footnote point size. If the value is larger than or equal to 1000, divide it by 1000 to get a fractional point size.
Effective: next footnote.
Default: \n[PS]
- 2.
Defines the footnote vertical spacing. If the value is larger than or equal to 1000, divide it by 1000 to get a fractional point size.
Effective: next footnote.
Default: \n[FPS]
+ 2.
Defines the footnote paragraph spacing.
Effective: next footnote.
Default: \n[PD]
/ 2.
Defines the minimum width between columns in a multi-column document.
Effective: next page.
Default: 2n.
Sets the vertical spacing before and after a display, a tbl
table, an
eqn
equation, or a pic
image.
Effective: next paragraph.
Default: 0.5v.
Next: ms Body Text, Previous: ms Document Control Registers, Up: ms [Contents][Index]
Use the following macros to create a cover page for your document in the order shown.
no
]Specifies the report format for your document. The report format
creates a separate cover page. The default action (no RP
macro)
is to print a subset of the cover page on page 1 of your document.
If you use the word no
as an optional argument, groff
prints a title page but does not repeat any of the title page
information (title, author, abstract, etc.) on page 1 of the
document.
(P-one) Prints the header on page 1. The default is to suppress the header.
(optional) Prints the current date, or the arguments to the macro if
any, on the title page (if specified) and in the footers. This is the
default for nroff
.
(optional) Prints the current date, or the arguments to the macro if
any, on the title page (if specified) but not in the footers. This is
the default for troff
.
Specifies the document title. groff
collects text following the
TL
macro into the title, until reaching the author name or
abstract.
Specifies the author’s name, which appears on the line (or lines) immediately following. You can specify multiple authors as follows:
.AU John Doe .AI University of West Bumblefuzz .AU Martha Buck .AI Monolithic Corporation ...
Specifies the author’s institution. You can specify multiple institutions in the same way that you specify multiple authors.
no
]Begins the abstract. The default is to print the word
ABSTRACT, centered and in italics, above the text of the
abstract. The word no
as an optional argument suppresses this
heading.
Ends the abstract.
The following is example mark-up for a title page.
.RP .TL The Inevitability of Code Bloat in Commercial and Free Software .AU J. Random Luser .AI University of West Bumblefuzz .AB This report examines the long-term growth of the code bases in two large, popular software packages; the free Emacs and the commercial Microsoft Word. While differences appear in the type or order of features added, due to the different methodologies used, the results are the same in the end. .PP The free software approach is shown to be superior in that while free software can become as bloated as commercial offerings, free software tends to have fewer serious bugs and the added features are in line with user demand. .AE ... the rest of the paper follows ... |
Next: ms Page Layout, Previous: ms Cover Page Macros, Up: ms [Contents][Index]
This section describes macros used to mark up the body of your document. Examples include paragraphs, sections, and other groups.
Next: Headings in ms, Previous: ms Body Text, Up: ms Body Text [Contents][Index]
The following paragraph types are available.
Sets a paragraph with an initial indentation.
Sets a paragraph without an initial indentation.
Sets a paragraph that is indented at both left and right margins
by the amount of the register QI
.
The effect is identical to the HTML <BLOCKQUOTE>
element.
The next paragraph or heading returns margins to normal.
QP
inserts vertical space of amount set by register PD
before the paragraph.
These macros begin and end a quoted section.
The QI
register
controls the amount of indentation.
Both QS
and QE
insert inter-paragraph vertical space
set by register PD
.
The text between QS
and QE
can be structured further
by use of the macros LP
or PP
.
Sets a paragraph whose lines are indented, except for the first line. This is a Berkeley extension.
The following markup uses all four paragraph macros.
.NH 2 Cases used in the study .LP The following software and versions were considered for this report. .PP For commercial software, we chose .B "Microsoft Word for Windows" , starting with version 1.0 through the current version (Word 2000). .PP For free software, we chose .B Emacs , from its first appearance as a standalone editor through the current version (v20). See [Bloggs 2002] for details. .QP Franklin's Law applied to software: software expands to outgrow both RAM and disk space over time. .LP Bibliography: .XP Bloggs, Joseph R., .I "Everyone's a Critic" , Underground Press, March 2002. A definitive work that answers all questions and criticisms about the quality and usability of free software. |
The PORPHANS
register (see ms Document Control Registers)
operates in conjunction with each of these macros, to inhibit the
printing of orphan lines at the bottom of any page.
Next: Highlighting in ms, Previous: Paragraphs in ms, Up: ms Body Text [Contents][Index]
Use headings to create a hierarchical structure for your document. The ms macros print headings in bold, using the same font family and point size as the body text.
The following describes the heading macros:
Numbered heading. The argument is either a numeric argument to indicate
the level of the heading, or the letter S
followed by
numeric arguments to set the heading level explicitly.
If you specify heading levels out of sequence, such as invoking
‘.NH 3’ after ‘.NH 1’, groff
prints a warning on
standard error.
After invocation of NH
, the assigned section number is made
available in the strings SN-DOT
(as it appears in a printed
section heading with default formatting, followed by a terminating
period), and SN-NO-DOT
(with the terminating period omitted).
The string SN
is also defined, as an alias for SN-DOT
; if
preferred, you may redefine it as an alias for SN-NO-DOT
, by
including the initialization
.als SN SN-NO-DOT
at any time before you would like the change to take effect.
You may control the style used to print section numbers, within numbered
section headings, by defining an appropriate alias for the string
SN-STYLE
. The default style, in which the printed section number
is followed by a terminating period, is obtained by defining the alias
.als SN-STYLE SN-DOT
If you prefer to omit the terminating period, from section numbers appearing in numbered section headings, you may define the alias
.als SN-STYLE SN-NO-DOT
Any such change in section numbering style becomes effective from the
next use of .NH
, following redefinition of the alias for
SN-STYLE
.
Unnumbered subheading.
The optional match-level argument is a GNU extension. It is a
number indicating the level of the heading, in a manner analogous to the
curr-level argument to .NH
. Its purpose is to match the
point size, at which the heading is printed, to the size of a numbered
heading at the same level, when the GROWPS
and PSINCR
heading size adjustment mechanism is in effect. See ms Document Control Registers.
The HORPHANS
register (see ms Document Control Registers)
operates in conjunction with the NH
and SH
macros, to
inhibit the printing of orphaned section headings at the bottom of any
page.
Next: Lists in ms, Previous: Headings in ms, Up: ms Body Text [Contents][Index]
The ms macros provide a variety of methods to highlight or emphasize text:
Sets its first argument in bold type. If you specify a second
argument, groff
prints it in the previous font after the bold
text, with no intervening space (this allows you to set punctuation
after the highlighted text without highlighting the punctuation).
Similarly, it prints the third argument (if any) in the previous font
before the first argument. For example,
.B foo ) (
prints (foo).
If you give this macro no arguments, groff
prints all text
following in bold until the next highlighting, paragraph, or heading
macro.
Sets its first argument in roman (or regular) type. It operates
similarly to the B
macro otherwise.
Sets its first argument in italic type. It operates similarly
to the B
macro otherwise.
Sets its first argument in a constant width face
. It operates
similarly to the B
macro otherwise.
Sets its first argument in bold italic type. It operates similarly to
the B
macro otherwise.
Prints its argument and draws a box around it. If you want to box a
string that contains spaces, use a digit-width space (\0
).
Prints its first argument with an underline. If you specify a second
argument, groff
prints it in the previous font after the
underlined text, with no intervening space.
Prints all text following in larger type (two points larger than the current point size) until the next font size, highlighting, paragraph, or heading macro. You can specify this macro multiple times to enlarge the point size as needed.
Prints all text following in smaller type (two points smaller than the current point size) until the next type size, highlighting, paragraph, or heading macro. You can specify this macro multiple times to reduce the point size as needed.
Prints all text following in the normal point size (that is, the value
of the PS
register).
Text enclosed with \*{
and \*}
is printed as a
superscript.
Next: Indentation values in ms, Previous: Highlighting in ms, Up: ms Body Text [Contents][Index]
The IP
macro handles duties for all lists.
The marker is usually a bullet glyph (\[bu]
) for unordered
lists, a number (or auto-incrementing number register) for numbered
lists, or a word or phrase for indented (glossary-style) lists.
The width specifies the indentation for the body of each list item; its default unit is ‘n’. Once specified, the indentation remains the same for all list items in the document until specified again.
The PORPHANS
register (see ms Document Control Registers)
operates in conjunction with the IP
macro, to inhibit the
printing of orphaned list markers at the bottom of any page.
The following is an example of a bulleted list.
A bulleted list: .IP \[bu] 2 lawyers .IP \[bu] guns .IP \[bu] money
Produces:
A bulleted list: o lawyers o guns o money
The following is an example of a numbered list.
.nr step 1 1 A numbered list: .IP \n[step] 3 lawyers .IP \n+[step] guns .IP \n+[step] money
Produces:
A numbered list: 1. lawyers 2. guns 3. money
Note the use of the auto-incrementing number register in this example.
The following is an example of a glossary-style list.
A glossary-style list: .IP lawyers 0.4i Two or more attorneys. .IP guns Firearms, preferably large-caliber. .IP money Gotta pay for those lawyers and guns!
Produces:
A glossary-style list: lawyers Two or more attorneys. guns Firearms, preferably large-caliber. money Gotta pay for those lawyers and guns!
In the last example, the IP
macro places the definition on the
same line as the term if it has enough space; otherwise, it breaks to
the next line and starts the definition below the term. This may or may
not be the effect you want, especially if some of the definitions break
and some do not. The following examples show two possible ways to force
a break.
The first workaround uses the br
request to force a break after
printing the term or label.
A glossary-style list: .IP lawyers 0.4i Two or more attorneys. .IP guns .br Firearms, preferably large-caliber. .IP money Gotta pay for those lawyers and guns! |
The second workaround uses the \p
escape to force the break.
Note the space following the escape; this is important. If you omit the
space, groff
prints the first word on the same line as the term
or label (if it fits) then breaks the line.
A glossary-style list: .IP lawyers 0.4i Two or more attorneys. .IP guns \p Firearms, preferably large-caliber. .IP money Gotta pay for those lawyers and guns! |
To set nested lists, use the RS
and RE
macros.
See Indentation values in ms, for more information.
For example:
.IP \[bu] 2 Lawyers: .RS .IP \[bu] Dewey, .IP \[bu] Cheatham, .IP \[bu] and Howe. .RE .IP \[bu] Guns |
Produces:
o Lawyers: o Dewey, o Cheatham, o and Howe. o Guns
Next: Tabstops in ms, Previous: Lists in ms, Up: ms Body Text [Contents][Index]
In many situations, you may need to indentation a section of text while still wrapping and filling. See Lists in ms, for an example of nested lists.
These macros begin and end an indented section. The PI
register
controls the amount of indentation, allowing the indented text to line
up under hanging and indented paragraphs.
See ms Displays and Keeps, for macros to indentation and turn off filling.
Next: ms Displays and Keeps, Previous: Indentation values in ms, Up: ms Body Text [Contents][Index]
Use the ta
request to define tab stops as needed. See Tabs and Fields.
Use this macro to reset the tab stops to the default for ms
(every 5n). You can redefine the TA
macro to create a different
set of default tab stops.
Next: ms Insertions, Previous: Tabstops in ms, Up: ms Body Text [Contents][Index]
Use displays to show text-based examples or figures (such as code listings).
Displays turn off filling, so lines of code are displayed as-is without
inserting br
requests in between each line. Displays can be
kept on a single page, or allowed to break across pages.
Left-justified display. The ‘.DS L’ call generates a page break,
if necessary, to keep the entire display on one page. The LD
macro allows the display to break across pages. The DE
macro
ends the display.
Indents the display as defined by the DI
register. The ‘.DS
I’ call generates a page break, if necessary, to keep the entire display
on one page. The ID
macro allows the display to break across
pages. The DE
macro ends the display.
Sets a block-centered display: the entire display is left-justified, but
indented so that the longest line in the display is centered on the
page. The ‘.DS B’ call generates a page break, if necessary, to
keep the entire display on one page. The BD
macro allows the
display to break across pages. The DE
macro ends the display.
Sets a centered display: each line in the display is centered. The
‘.DS C’ call generates a page break, if necessary, to keep the
entire display on one page. The CD
macro allows the display to
break across pages. The DE
macro ends the display.
Right-justifies each line in the display. The ‘.DS R’ call
generates a page break, if necessary, to keep the entire display on one
page. The RD
macro allows the display to break across pages.
The DE
macro ends the display.
These two macros were formerly provided as aliases for DS
and
DE
, respectively. They have been removed, and should no longer
be used. The original implementations of DS
and DE
are
retained, and should be used instead. X11 documents that actually use
Ds
and De
always load a specific macro file from the X11
distribution (macros.t) that provides proper definitions for the
two macros.
On occasion, you may want to keep other text together on a page.
For example, you may want to keep two paragraphs together, or a
paragraph that refers to a table (or list, or other item) immediately
following. The ms macros provide the KS
and KE
macros for this purpose.
The KS
macro begins a block of text to be kept on a single page,
and the KE
macro ends the block.
Specifies a floating keep; if the keep cannot fit on the current
page, groff
holds the contents of the keep and allows text
following the keep (in the source file) to fill in the remainder of the
current page. When the page breaks, whether by an explicit bp
request or by reaching the end of the page, groff
prints the
floating keep at the top of the new page. This is useful for printing
large graphics or tables that do not need to appear exactly where
specified.
You can also use the ne
request to force a page break if there is
not enough vertical space remaining on the page.
Use the following macros to draw a box around a section of text (such as a display).
Marks the beginning and ending of text that is to have a box drawn
around it. The B1
macro begins the box; the B2
macro ends
it. Text in the box is automatically placed in a diversion (keep).
Next: Example multi-page table, Previous: ms Displays and Keeps, Up: ms Body Text [Contents][Index]
The ms macros support the standard groff
preprocessors:
tbl
, pic
, eqn
, and refer
.
You mark text meant for preprocessors by enclosing it in pairs of tags
as follows.
H
]Denotes a table, to be processed by the tbl
preprocessor. The
optional argument H
to TS
instructs groff
to
create a running header with the information up to the TH
macro.
groff
prints the header at the beginning of the table; if the
table runs onto another page, groff
prints the header on the next
page as well.
Denotes a graphic, to be processed by the pic
preprocessor. You
can create a pic
file by hand, using the AT&T
pic
manual available on the Web as a reference, or by using a
graphics program such as xfig
.
Denotes an equation, to be processed by the eqn
preprocessor.
The optional align argument can be C
, L
,
or I
to center (the default), left-justify, or indent the
equation.
Denotes a reference, to be processed by the refer
preprocessor.
The GNU refer(1) man page provides a comprehensive reference to
the preprocessor and the format of the bibliographic database.
• Example multi-page table: |
Next: ms Footnotes, Previous: ms Insertions, Up: ms Body Text [Contents][Index]
The following is an example of how to set up a table that may print across two or more pages.
.TS H allbox expand; cb | cb . Text ...of heading... _ .TH .T& l | l . ... the rest of the table follows... .CW .TE |
Previous: Example multi-page table, Up: ms Body Text [Contents][Index]
The ms macro package has a flexible footnote system. You can specify either numbered footnotes or symbolic footnotes (that is, using a marker such as a dagger symbol).
Specifies the location of a numbered footnote marker in the text.
Specifies the text of the footnote. The default action is to create a
numbered footnote; you can create a symbolic footnote by specifying a
mark glyph (such as \[dg]
for the dagger glyph) in the body
text and as an argument to the FS
macro, followed by the text of
the footnote and the FE
macro.
You can control how groff
prints footnote numbers by changing the
value of the FF
register. See ms Document Control Registers.
Footnotes can be safely used within keeps and displays, but you should
avoid using numbered footnotes within floating keeps. You can set a
second \**
marker between a \**
and its corresponding
.FS
entry; as long as each FS
macro occurs after
the corresponding \**
and the occurrences of .FS
are in
the same order as the corresponding occurrences of \**
.
Next: Differences from AT&T ms, Previous: ms Body Text, Up: ms [Contents][Index]
The default output from the ms macros provides a minimalist page layout: it prints a single column, with the page number centered at the top of each page. It prints no footers.
You can change the layout by setting the proper number registers and strings.
• ms Headers and Footers: | ||
• ms Margins: | ||
• ms Multiple Columns: | ||
• ms TOC: | ||
• ms Strings and Special Characters: |
Next: ms Margins, Previous: ms Page Layout, Up: ms Page Layout [Contents][Index]
For documents that do not distinguish between odd and even pages, set the following strings:
Sets the left, center, and right headers.
Sets the left, center, and right footers.
For documents that need different information printed in the even and odd pages, use the following macros:
The OH
and EH
macros define headers for the odd and even
pages; the OF
and EF
macros define footers for the odd and
even pages. This is more flexible than defining the individual strings.
You can replace the quote ('
) marks with any character not
appearing in the header or footer text.
To specify custom header and footer processing, redefine the following macros:
The PT
macro defines a custom header; the BT
macro defines
a custom footer. These macros must handle odd/even/first page
differences if necessary.
The HD
macro defines additional header processing to take place
after executing the PT
macro.
Next: ms Multiple Columns, Previous: ms Headers and Footers, Up: ms Page Layout [Contents][Index]
You control margins using a set of number registers. See ms Document Control Registers, for details.
Next: ms TOC, Previous: ms Margins, Up: ms Page Layout [Contents][Index]
The ms macros can set text in as many columns as do reasonably fit on the page. The following macros are available; all of them force a page break if a multi-column mode is already set. However, if the current mode is single-column, starting a multi-column mode does not force a page break.
Single-column mode.
Two-column mode.
Multi-column mode. If you specify no arguments, it is equivalent to the
2C
macro. Otherwise, width is the width of each column and
gutter is the space between columns. The MINGW
number
register controls the default gutter width.
Next: ms Strings and Special Characters, Previous: ms Multiple Columns, Up: ms Page Layout [Contents][Index]
The facilities in the ms macro package for creating a table of
contents are semi-automated at best. Assuming that you want the table
of contents to consist of the document’s headings, you need to repeat
those headings wrapped in XS
and XE
macros.
These macros define a table of contents or an individual entry in the table of contents, depending on their use. The macros are very simple; they cannot indent a heading based on its level. The easiest way to work around this is to add tabs to the table of contents string. The following is an example:
.NH 1 Introduction .XS Introduction .XE .LP ... .CW .NH 2 Methodology .XS Methodology .XE .LP ... |
You can manually create a table of contents by beginning with the
XS
macro for the first entry, specifying the page number for that
entry as the argument to XS
. Add subsequent entries using the
XA
macro, specifying the page number for that entry as the
argument to XA
. The following is an example:
.XS 1 Introduction .XA 2 A Brief History of the Universe .XA 729 Details of Galactic Formation ... .XE |
no
]Prints the table of contents on a new page, setting the page number
to i (Roman lowercase numeral one). You should usually
place this macro at the end of the file, since groff
is a
single-pass formatter and can only print what has been collected up to
the point that the TC
macro appears.
The optional argument no
suppresses printing the title specified
by the string register TOC
.
no
]Prints the table of contents on a new page, using the current page numbering sequence. Use this macro to print a manually generated table of contents at the beginning of your document.
The optional argument no
suppresses printing the title specified
by the string register TOC
.
The Groff and Friends HOWTO includes a sed
script that
automatically inserts XS
and XE
macro entries after each
heading in a document.
Altering the NH
macro to automatically build the table of
contents is perhaps initially more difficult, but would save a great
deal of time in the long run if you use ms regularly.
Previous: ms TOC, Up: ms Page Layout [Contents][Index]
The ms macros provide the following predefined strings. You can change the string definitions to help in creating documents in languages other than English.
Contains the string printed at the beginning of the references (bibliography) page. The default is ‘References’.
Contains the string printed at the beginning of the abstract. The default is ‘ABSTRACT’.
Contains the string printed at the beginning of the table of contents.
Prints the full name of the month in dates. The default is ‘January’, ‘February’, etc.
The following special characters are available8:
Prints an em dash.
Prints typographer’s quotes in troff, and plain quotes in nroff.
\*Q
is the left quote and \*U
is the right quote.
Improved accent marks are available in the ms macros.
Specify this macro at the beginning of your document to enable extended accent marks and special characters. This is a Berkeley extension.
To use the accent marks, place them after the character being accented.
Note that groff’s native support for accents is superior to the following definitions.
The following accent marks are available after invoking the AM
macro:
Acute accent.
Grave accent.
Circumflex.
Cedilla.
Tilde.
Umlaut.
Hacek.
Macron (overbar).
Underdot.
Ring above.
The following are standalone characters available after invoking the
AM
macro:
Upside-down question mark.
Upside-down exclamation point.
German ß ligature.
Yogh.
Uppercase thorn.
Lowercase thorn.
Uppercase eth.
Lowercase eth.
Hooked o.
Lowercase æ ligature.
Uppercase Æ ligature.
Next: Naming Conventions, Previous: ms Page Layout, Up: ms [Contents][Index]
This section lists the (minor) differences between the groff -ms
macros and AT&T troff -ms
macros.
groff -ms
differ from the internals of
AT&T troff -ms
. Documents that depend upon
implementation details of AT&T troff -ms
may not format
properly with groff -ms
.
groff -ms
is to detect and
report errors, rather than silently to ignore them.
groff -ms
does not work in compatibility mode (that is, with the
-C option).
groff -ms
does not provide cut marks.
ms
documentation says that the CW
and GW
number registers can be used to control the column width and gutter
width, respectively. These number registers are not used in groff
-ms
.
in
request but instead the RS
and RE
macros.
groff -ms
use the default page offset (which also
specifies the left margin), the PO
register must stay undefined
until the first -ms macro is evaluated. This implies that
PO
should not be used early in the document, unless it is changed
also: Remember that accessing an undefined register automatically
defines it.
This number register is set to 1 by the groff -ms
macros,
but it is not used by the AT&T
troff -ms
macros.
Documents that need to determine whether they are being formatted with
AT&T
troff -ms
or groff -ms
should use this number
register.
Emulations of a few ancient Bell Labs macros can be re-enabled by
calling the otherwise undocumented SC
section-header macro.
Calling SC
enables UC
for marking up a product or
application name, and the pair P1
/P2
for surrounding code
example displays.
These are not enabled by default because (a) they were not
documented, in the original ms
manual, and (b) the P1
and UC
macros collide with different macros with the same names
in the Berkeley version of ms
.
These groff
emulations are sufficient to give back the 1976
Kernighan & Cherry paper Typesetting Mathematics – User’s
Guide its section headings, and restore some text that had gone missing
as arguments of undefined macros. No warranty express or implied is
given as to how well the typographic details these produce match the
original Bell Labs macros.
• Missing ms Macros: | ||
• Additional ms Macros: |
Next: Additional ms Macros, Previous: Differences from AT&T ms, Up: Differences from AT&T ms [Contents][Index]
troff
macros not appearing in groff
Macros missing from groff -ms
are cover page macros specific to
Bell Labs and Berkeley. The macros known to be missing are:
.TM
Technical memorandum; a cover sheet style
.IM
Internal memorandum; a cover sheet style
.MR
Memo for record; a cover sheet style
.MF
Memo for file; a cover sheet style
.EG
Engineer’s notes; a cover sheet style
.TR
Computing Science Tech Report; a cover sheet style
.OK
Other keywords
.CS
Cover sheet information
.MH
A cover sheet macro
Previous: Missing ms Macros, Up: Differences from AT&T ms [Contents][Index]
groff
macros not appearing in AT&T troff
The groff -ms
macros have a few minor extensions compared to the
AT&T troff -ms
macros.
Improved accent marks. See ms Strings and Special Characters, for details.
Indented display. The default behavior of AT&T troff
-ms
was to indent; the groff
default prints displays flush left
with the body text.
Print text in constant width
(Courier) font.
Indexing term (printed on standard error). You can write a script to capture and process an index generated in this manner.
The following additional number registers
appear in groff -ms
:
Specifies a minimum space between columns (for multi-column output);
this takes the place of the GW
register that was documented but
apparently not implemented in AT&T troff
.
Several new string registers are available as well. You can change these to handle (for example) the local language. See ms Strings and Special Characters, for details.
Previous: Differences from AT&T ms, Up: ms [Contents][Index]
The following conventions are used for names of macros, strings and
number registers. External names available to documents that use the
groff -ms
macros contain only uppercase letters and digits.
Internally the macros are divided into modules; naming conventions are as follows:
*
name.
@
name.
:
name; these are used only within the
par
module.
!
index.
Thus the groff ms macros reserve the following names:
*
, @
, and :
.
Next: mm, Previous: ms, Up: Macro Packages [Contents][Index]
See the meintro.me and meref.me documents in groff’s doc directory.
Next: mom, Previous: me, Up: Macro Packages [Contents][Index]
See the groff_mm(7) man page (type man groff_mm
at the
command line).
Previous: mm, Up: Macro Packages [Contents][Index]
The main documentation files for the mom macros are in HTML format. Additional, useful documentation is in PDF format. See the groff(1) man page, section “Installation Directories”, for their location.
The mom macros are in active development between groff releases. The most recent version, along with up-to-date documentation, is available at http://www.schaffter.ca/mom/mom-05.html.
The groff_mom(7) man page (type man groff_mom
at the
command line) contains a partial list of available macros, however their
usage is best understood by consulting the HTML documentation.
Next: Preprocessors, Previous: Macro Packages, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
gtroff
ReferenceThis chapter covers all of the facilities of gtroff
.
Users of macro packages may skip it if not interested in details.
• Text: | ||
• Measurements: | ||
• Expressions: | ||
• Identifiers: | ||
• Embedded Commands: | ||
• Registers: | ||
• Manipulating Filling and Adjusting: | ||
• Manipulating Hyphenation: | ||
• Manipulating Spacing: | ||
• Tabs and Fields: | ||
• Character Translations: | ||
• Troff and Nroff Mode: | ||
• Line Layout: | ||
• Line Control: | ||
• Page Layout: | ||
• Page Control: | ||
• Fonts and Symbols: | ||
• Sizes: | ||
• Strings: | ||
• Conditionals and Loops: | ||
• Writing Macros: | ||
• Page Motions: | ||
• Drawing Requests: | ||
• Traps: | ||
• Diversions: | ||
• Environments: | ||
• Suppressing output: | ||
• Colors: | ||
• I/O: | ||
• Postprocessor Access: | ||
• Miscellaneous: | ||
• Gtroff Internals: | ||
• Debugging: | ||
• Implementation Differences: |
Next: Measurements, Previous: gtroff Reference, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
gtroff
input files contain text with control commands
interspersed throughout. But, even without control codes, gtroff
still does several things with the input text:
• Filling and Adjusting: | ||
• Hyphenation: | ||
• Sentences: | ||
• Tab Stops: | ||
• Implicit Line Breaks: | ||
• Input Conventions: | ||
• Input Encodings: |
Next: Hyphenation, Previous: Text, Up: Text [Contents][Index]
When gtroff
reads text, it collects words from the input and fits
as many of them together on one output line as it can. This is known as
filling.
Once gtroff
has a filled line, it tries to adjust it.
This means it widens the spacing between words until the text reaches
the right margin (in the default adjustment mode). Extra spaces between
words are preserved, but spaces at the end of lines are ignored. Spaces
at the front of a line cause a break (breaks are explained in
Implicit Line Breaks).
See Manipulating Filling and Adjusting.
Next: Sentences, Previous: Filling and Adjusting, Up: Text [Contents][Index]
Since the odds are not great for finding a set of words, for every
output line, which fit nicely on a line without inserting excessive
amounts of space between words, gtroff
hyphenates words so that
it can justify lines without inserting too much space between words. It
uses an internal hyphenation algorithm (a simplified version of the
algorithm used within TeX) to indicate which words can be hyphenated
and how to do so. When a word is hyphenated, the first part of the word
is added to the current filled line being output (with an attached
hyphen), and the other portion is added to the next line to be filled.
Next: Tab Stops, Previous: Hyphenation, Up: Text [Contents][Index]
Although it is often debated, some typesetting rules say there should be different amounts of space after various punctuation marks. For example, the Chicago typesetting manual says that a period at the end of a sentence should have twice as much space following it as would a comma or a period as part of an abbreviation.
gtroff
does this by flagging certain characters (normally
‘!’, ‘?’, and ‘.’) as end-of-sentence characters.
When gtroff
encounters one of these characters at the end of a
line, it appends a normal space followed by a sentence space in
the formatted output. (This justifies one of the conventions mentioned
in Input Conventions.)
In addition, the following characters and symbols are treated
transparently while handling end-of-sentence characters: ‘"’,
‘'’, ‘)’, ‘]’, ‘*’, \[dg]
, \[rq]
, and
\[cq]
.
See the cflags
request in Using Symbols, for more details.
To prevent the insertion of extra space after an end-of-sentence
character (at the end of a line), append \&
.
Next: Implicit Line Breaks, Previous: Sentences, Up: Text [Contents][Index]
gtroff
translates tabulator characters, also called
tabs (normally code point ASCII 0x09
or
EBCDIC 0x05
), in the input into movements to the next
tabulator stop. These tab stops are initially located every half inch
across the page. Using this, simple tables can be made easily.
However, it can often be deceptive as the appearance (and width) of the
text on a terminal and the results from gtroff
can vary greatly.
Also, a possible sticking point is that lines beginning with tab characters are still filled, again producing unexpected results. For example, the following input
1 | 2 | 3 | |
4 | 5 |
produces
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
See Tabs and Fields.
Next: Input Conventions, Previous: Tab Stops, Up: Text [Contents][Index]
An important concept in gtroff
is the break. When a break
occurs, gtroff
outputs the partially filled line (unjustified),
and resumes collecting and filling text on the next output line.
There are several ways to cause a break in gtroff
. A blank line
not only causes a break, but it also outputs a one-line vertical space
(effectively a blank line). Note that this behaviour can be modified
with the blank line macro request blm
. See Blank Line Traps.
A line that begins with a space causes a break and the space is output
at the beginning of the next line. Note that this space isn’t adjusted,
even in fill mode; however, the behaviour can be modified with the
leading spaces macro request lsm
. See Leading Spaces Traps.
The end of file also causes a break – otherwise the last line of the document may vanish!
Certain requests also cause breaks, implicitly or explicitly. This is discussed in Manipulating Filling and Adjusting.
Next: Input Encodings, Previous: Implicit Line Breaks, Up: Text [Contents][Index]
Since gtroff
does filling automatically, it is traditional in
groff
not to try and type things in as nicely formatted
paragraphs. These are some conventions commonly used when typing
gtroff
text:
Previous: Input Conventions, Up: Text [Contents][Index]
Currently, the following input encodings are available.
This input encoding works only on EBCDIC platforms (and vice versa, the other input encodings don’t work with EBCDIC); the file cp1047.tmac is by default loaded at start-up.
This is the default input encoding on non-EBCDIC platforms; the file latin1.tmac is loaded at start-up.
To use this encoding, either say ‘.mso latin2.tmac’ at the very
beginning of your document or use ‘-mlatin2’ as a command-line
argument for groff
.
For Turkish. Either say ‘.mso latin5.tmac’ at the very
beginning of your document or use ‘-mlatin5’ as a command-line
argument for groff
.
This encoding is intended (at least in Europe) to replace latin-1
encoding. The main difference to latin-1 is that latin-9
contains the Euro character. To use this encoding, either say
‘.mso latin9.tmac’ at the very beginning of your document or
use ‘-mlatin9’ as a command-line argument for groff
.
Note that it can happen that some input encoding characters are not available for a particular output device. For example, saying
groff -Tlatin1 -mlatin9 ...
fails if you use the Euro character in the input. Usually, this limitation is present only for devices that have a limited set of output glyphs (e.g. -Tascii and -Tlatin1); for other devices it is usually sufficient to install proper fonts that contain the necessary glyphs.
Due to the importance of the Euro glyph in Europe, the groff package now comes with a POSTSCRIPT font called freeeuro.pfa, which provides various glyph shapes for the Euro. In other words, latin-9 encoding is supported for the -Tps device out of the box (latin-2 isn’t).
By its very nature, -Tutf8 supports all input encodings; -Tdvi has support for both latin-2 and latin-9 if the command-line -mec is used also to load the file ec.tmac (which flips to the EC fonts).
Next: Expressions, Previous: Text, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
gtroff
(like many other programs) requires numeric parameters to
specify various measurements. Most numeric parameters9 may have a
measurement unit attached. These units are specified as a single
character that immediately follows the number or expression. Each of
these units are understood, by gtroff
, to be a multiple of its
basic unit. So, whenever a different measurement unit is
specified gtroff
converts this into its basic units. This
basic unit, represented by a ‘u’, is a device dependent measurement,
which is quite small, ranging from 1/75th to 1/72000th of an
inch. The values may be given as fractional numbers; however,
fractional basic units are always rounded to integers.
Some of the measurement units are completely independent of any of the
current settings (e.g. type size) of gtroff
.
Although groff’s basic unit is device-dependent, it may still be smaller
than the smallest unit the device is capable of producing. The register
.H
specifies how many groff basic units constitute the current
device’s basic unit horizontally, and the register .V
specifies
this value vertically.
i
Inches. An antiquated measurement unit still in use in certain backwards countries with incredibly low-cost computer equipment. One inch is defined to be 2.54 cm (worldwide since 1964).
c
Centimeters. One centimeter is about 0.3937 in.
p
Points. This is a typesetter’s measurement used for measure type size. It is 72 points to an inch.
P
Pica. Another typesetting measurement. 6 picas to an inch (and 12 points to a pica).
s
z
See Fractional Type Sizes, for a discussion of these units.
f
Fractions. Value is 65536. See Colors, for usage.
The other measurements understood by gtroff
depend on settings
currently in effect in gtroff
. These are very useful for
specifying measurements that should look proper with any size of text.
m
Ems. This unit is equal to the current font size in points. So called because it is approximately the width of the letter ‘m’ in the current font.
n
Ens. In groff
, this is half of an em.
v
Vertical space. This is equivalent to the current line spacing. See Sizes, for more information about this.
M
100ths of an em.
• Default Units: |
Previous: Measurements, Up: Measurements [Contents][Index]
Many requests take a default unit. While this can be helpful at times, it can cause strange errors in some expressions. For example, the line length request expects em units. Here are several attempts to get a line length of 3.5 inches and their results:
3.5i ⇒ 3.5i 7/2 ⇒ 0i 7/2i ⇒ 0i (7 / 2)u ⇒ 0i 7i/2 ⇒ 0.1i 7i/2u ⇒ 3.5i
Everything is converted to basic units first. In the above example it is assumed that 1i equals 240u, and 1m equals 10p (thus 1m equals 33u). The value 7i/2 is first handled as 7i/2m, then converted to 1680u/66u, which is 25u, and this is approximately 0.1i. As can be seen, a scaling indicator after a closing parenthesis is simply ignored.
Thus, the safest way to specify measurements is to always attach a scaling indicator. If you want to multiply or divide by a certain scalar value, use ‘u’ as the unit for that value.
Next: Identifiers, Previous: Measurements, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
gtroff
has most arithmetic operators common to other languages:
gtroff
only provides integer arithmetic. The internal type used
for computing results is ‘int’, which is usually a 32-bit signed
integer.
if
and while
requests).10 See below for the use of unary operators in motion requests.
The logical not operator,
as described above,
works only within if
and while
requests.
Furthermore, it may appear
only at the beginning of an expression,
and negates the entire expression.
Attempting to insert the ‘!’ operator
within the expression results in a
‘numeric expression expected’ warning. This
maintains compatibility
with old versions of troff
.
Example:
.nr X 1 .nr Y 0 .\" This does not work as expected .if (\n[X])&(!\n[Y]) .nop X only . .\" Use this construct instead .if (\n[X]=1)&(\n[Y]=0) .nop X only
Example:
.nr x 5 .nr y 3 .nr z (\n[x] >? \n[y])
The register z
now contains 5.
(c;e)
. Evaluate e
using c as the default scaling indicator. If c is
missing, ignore scaling indicators in the evaluation of e.
Parentheses may be used as in any other language. However, in
gtroff
they are necessary to ensure order of evaluation.
gtroff
has no operator precedence; expressions are evaluated left
to right. This means that gtroff
evaluates ‘3+5*4’ as if it
were parenthesized like ‘(3+5)*4’, not as ‘3+(5*4)’, as might
be expected.
For many requests that cause a motion on the page, the unary operators ‘+’ and ‘-’ work differently if leading an expression. They then indicate a motion relative to the current position (down or up, respectively).
Similarly, a leading ‘|’ operator indicates an absolute position. For vertical movements, it specifies the distance from the top of the page; for horizontal movements, it gives the distance from the beginning of the input line.
‘+’ and ‘-’ are also treated differently by the following
requests and escapes: bp
, in
, ll
, lt
,
nm
, nr
, pl
, pn
, po
, ps
,
pvs
, rt
, ti
, \H
, \R
, and \s
.
Here, leading plus and minus signs indicate increments and decrements.
See Setting Registers, for some examples.
Return 1 if anything is a valid numeric expression; or 0 if anything is empty or not a valid numeric expression.
Due to the way arguments are parsed, spaces are not allowed in expressions, unless the entire expression is surrounded by parentheses.
See Request and Macro Arguments, and Conditionals and Loops.
Next: Embedded Commands, Previous: Expressions, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
Like any other language, gtroff
has rules for properly formed
identifiers. In gtroff
, an identifier can be made up of
almost any printable character, with the exception of the following
characters:
0x08
or
EBCDIC 0x16
) and character code 0x01
.
groff
runs on a machine based on ASCII, causing a
warning message of type ‘input’ (see Debugging, for more
details): 0x00
, 0x0B
, 0x0D
–0x1F
,
0x80
–0x9F
.
And here are the invalid input characters if groff
runs on an
EBCDIC host: 0x00
, 0x08
, 0x09
,
0x0B
, 0x0D
–0x14
, 0x17
–0x1F
,
0x30
–0x3F
.
Currently, some of these reserved codepoints are used internally, thus
making it non-trivial to extend gtroff
to cover Unicode or other
character sets and encodings that use characters of these ranges.
Note that invalid characters are removed before parsing; an identifier
foo
, followed by an invalid character, followed by bar
is
treated as foobar
.
For example, any of the following is valid.
br PP (l end-list @_
Note that identifiers longer than two characters with a closing bracket (‘]’) in its name can’t be accessed with escape sequences that expect an identifier as a parameter. For example, ‘\[foo]]’ accesses the glyph ‘foo’, followed by ‘]’, whereas ‘\C'foo]'’ really asks for glyph ‘foo]’.
To avoid problems with the refer
preprocessor, macro names should
not start with ‘[’ or ‘]’. Due to backwards compatibility,
everything after ‘.[’ and ‘.]’ is handled as a special
argument to refer
. For example, ‘.[foo’ makes refer
to start a reference, using ‘foo’ as a parameter.
Test whether an identifier ident is valid in gtroff
. It
expands to the character 1 or 0 according to whether its
argument (usually delimited by quotes) is or is not acceptable as the
name of a string, macro, diversion, number register, environment, or
font. It returns 0 if no argument is given. This is useful for
looking up user input in some sort of associative table.
\A'end-list' ⇒ 1
See Escapes, for details on parameter delimiting characters.
Identifiers in gtroff
can be any length, but, in some contexts,
gtroff
needs to be told where identifiers end and text begins
(and in different ways depending on their length):
gtroff
only). Must be bracketed with ‘[’
and ‘]’ in some situations. Any length identifier can be put
in brackets.
Unlike many other programming languages, undefined identifiers are
silently ignored or expanded to nothing. When gtroff
finds an
undefined identifier, it emits a warning, doing the following:
gtroff
defines it as empty.
gtroff
defines it with a
value of 0.
See Warnings., Interpolating Registers, and Strings.
Note that macros, strings, and diversions share the same name space.
.de xxx . nop foo .. . .di xxx bar .br .di . .xxx ⇒ bar
As can be seen in the previous example, gtroff
reuses the
identifier ‘xxx’, changing it from a macro to a diversion. No
warning is emitted! The contents of the first macro definition is lost.
See Interpolating Registers, and Strings.
Next: Registers, Previous: Identifiers, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
Most documents need more functionality beyond filling, adjusting and
implicit line breaking. In order to gain further functionality,
gtroff
allows commands to be embedded into the text, in two ways.
The first is a request that takes up an entire line, and does some large-scale operation (e.g. break lines, start new pages).
The other is an escape that can be usually embedded anywhere in the text; most requests can accept it even as an argument. Escapes generally do more minor operations like sub- and superscripts, print a symbol, etc.
• Requests: | ||
• Macros: | ||
• Escapes: |
Next: Macros, Previous: Embedded Commands, Up: Embedded Commands [Contents][Index]
A request line begins with a control character, which is either a single quote (‘'’, the no-break control character) or a period (‘.’, the normal control character). These can be changed; see Character Translations, for details. After this there may be optional tabs or spaces followed by an identifier, which is the name of the request. This may be followed by any number of space-separated arguments (no tabs here).
Since a control character followed by whitespace only is ignored, it is common practice to use this feature for structuring the source code of documents or macro packages.
.de foo . tm This is foo. .. . . .de bar . tm This is bar. ..
Another possibility is to use the blank line macro request blm
by
assigning an empty macro to it.
.de do-nothing .. .blm do-nothing \" activate blank line macro .de foo . tm This is foo. .. .de bar . tm This is bar. .. .blm \" deactivate blank line macro
See Blank Line Traps.
To begin a line with a control character without it being interpreted,
precede it with \&
. This represents a zero width space, which
means it does not affect the output.
In most cases the period is used as a control character. Several requests cause a break implicitly; using the single quote control character prevents this.
A read-only number register, which is set to 1 if a macro is called
with the normal control character (as defined with the cc
request), and set to 0 otherwise.
This allows reliable modification of requests.
.als bp*orig bp .de bp . tm before bp . ie \\n[.br] .bp*orig . el 'bp*orig . tm after bp ..
Using this register outside of a macro makes no sense (it always returns zero in such cases).
If a macro is called as a string (that is, using \*
), the value
of the .br
register is inherited from the caller.
• Request and Macro Arguments: |
Arguments to requests and macros are processed much like the shell: The line is split into arguments according to spaces.11
An argument to a macro that is intended to contain spaces can either be enclosed in double quotes, or have the spaces escaped with backslashes. This is not true for requests.
Here are a few examples for a hypothetical macro uh
:
.uh The Mouse Problem .uh "The Mouse Problem" .uh The\ Mouse\ Problem
The first line is the uh
macro being called with 3 arguments,
‘The’, ‘Mouse’, and ‘Problem’. The latter two have the
same effect of calling the uh
macro with one argument, ‘The
Mouse Problem’.12
A double quote that isn’t preceded by a space doesn’t start a macro argument. If not closing a string, it is printed literally.
For example,
.xxx a" "b c" "de"fg"
has the arguments ‘a"’, ‘b c’, ‘de’, and ‘fg"’. Don’t rely on this obscure behaviour!
There are two possibilities to get a double quote reliably.
groff
):
.de xx . tm xx: `\\$1' `\\$2' `\\$3' . . yy "\\$1" "\\$2" "\\$3" .. .de yy . tm yy: `\\$1' `\\$2' `\\$3' .. .xx A "test with ""quotes""" . ⇒ xx: `A' `test with "quotes"' `.' ⇒ yy: `A' `test with ' `quotes""'
If not in compatibility mode, you get the expected result
xx: `A' `test with "quotes"' `.' yy: `A' `test with "quotes"' `.'
since gtroff
preserves the input level.
\(dq
. This works with and without
compatibility mode enabled since gtroff
doesn’t convert
\(dq
back to a double quote input character.
Note that this method won’t work with Unix troff
in general since
the glyph ‘dq’ isn’t defined normally.
Double quotes in the ds
request are handled differently.
See Strings, for more details.
Next: Escapes, Previous: Requests, Up: Embedded Commands [Contents][Index]
gtroff
has a macro facility for defining a series of lines
that can be invoked by name. They are called in the same manner as
requests – arguments also may be passed basically in the same manner.
See Writing Macros, and Request and Macro Arguments.
Previous: Macros, Up: Embedded Commands [Contents][Index]
Escapes may occur anywhere in the input to gtroff
. They usually
begin with a backslash and are followed by a single character, which
indicates the function to be performed. The escape character can be
changed; see Character Translations.
Escape sequences that require an identifier as a parameter accept three possible syntax forms.
Examples:
\fB \n(XX \*[TeX]
Other escapes may require several arguments and/or some special format. In such cases the argument is traditionally enclosed in single quotes (and quotes are always used in this manual for the definitions of escape sequences). The enclosed text is then processed according to what that escape expects. Example:
\l'1.5i\(bu'
Note that the quote character can be replaced with any other character
that does not occur in the argument (even a newline or a space
character) in the following escapes: \o
, \b
, and
\X
. This makes e.g.
A caf \o e\' in Paris ⇒ A café in Paris
possible, but it is better not to use this feature to avoid confusion.
The following escape sequences (which are handled similarly to
characters since they don’t take a parameter) are also allowed as
delimiters: \%
, ‘\ ’, \|
, \^
, \{
,
\}
, \'
, \`
, \-
, \_
, \!
,
\?
, \)
, \/
, \,
, \&
, \:
,
\~
, \0
, \a
, \c
, \d
, \e
,
\E
, \p
, \r
, \t
, and \u
. Again, don’t
use these if possible.
No newline characters as delimiters are allowed in the following
escapes: \A
, \B
, \Z
, \C
, and \w
.
Finally, the escapes \D
, \h
, \H
, \l
,
\L
, \N
, \R
, \s
, \S
, \v
, and
\x
can’t use the following characters as delimiters:
0
-9
.
\%
, \:
, \{
,
\}
, \'
, \`
, \-
, \_
, \!
,
\/
, \c
, \e
, and \p
.
To have a backslash (actually, the current escape character) appear in
the output several escapes are defined: \\
, \e
or
\E
. These are very similar, and only differ with respect to
being used in macros or diversions. See Character Translations, for
an exact description of those escapes.
See Implementation Differences, Copy-in Mode, and Diversions, Identifiers, for more information.
• Comments: |
Probably one of the most13 common forms of escapes is the comment.
Start a comment. Everything to the end of the input line is ignored.
This may sound simple, but it can be tricky to keep the comments from interfering with the appearance of the final output.
If the escape is to the right of some text or a request, that portion of
the line is ignored, but the space leading up to it is noticed by
gtroff
. This only affects the ds
and as
request
and its variants.
One possibly irritating idiosyncracy is that tabs must not be used to line up comments. Tabs are not treated as whitespace between the request and macro arguments.
A comment on a line by itself is treated as a blank line, because after eliminating the comment, that is all that remains:
Test \" comment Test
produces
Test Test
To avoid this, it is common to start the line with .\"
, which
causes the line to be treated as an undefined request and thus ignored
completely.
Another commenting scheme seen sometimes is three consecutive single
quotes ('''
) at the beginning of a line. This works, but
gtroff
gives a warning about an undefined macro (namely
''
), which is harmless, but irritating.
To avoid all this, gtroff
has a new comment mechanism using the
\#
escape. This escape works the same as \"
except that
the newline is also ignored:
Test \# comment Test
produces
Test Test
as expected.
Ignore all input until gtroff
encounters the macro named
.
end on a line by itself (or ..
if end is not
specified). This is useful for commenting out large blocks of text:
text text text... .ig This is part of a large block of text that has been temporarily(?) commented out. We can restore it simply by removing the .ig request and the ".." at the end of the block. .. More text text text...
produces
text text text… More text text text…
Note that the commented-out block of text does not cause a break.
The input is read in copy-mode; auto-incremented registers are affected (see Auto-increment).
Next: Manipulating Filling and Adjusting, Previous: Embedded Commands, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
Numeric variables in gtroff
are called registers. There
are a number of built-in registers, supplying anything from the date to
details of formatting parameters.
See Identifiers, for details on register identifiers.
• Setting Registers: | ||
• Interpolating Registers: | ||
• Auto-increment: | ||
• Assigning Formats: | ||
• Built-in Registers: |
Next: Interpolating Registers, Previous: Registers, Up: Registers [Contents][Index]
Define or set registers using the nr
request or the \R
escape.
Although the following requests and escapes can be used to create registers, simply using an undefined register will cause it to be set to zero.
Set number register ident to value. If ident doesn’t
exist, gtroff
creates it.
The argument to \R
usually has to be enclosed in quotes.
See Escapes, for details on parameter delimiting characters.
The \R
escape doesn’t produce an input token in gtroff
;
in other words, it vanishes completely after gtroff
has
processed it.
For example, the following two lines are equivalent:
.nr a (((17 + (3 * 4))) % 4) \R'a (((17 + (3 * 4))) % 4)' ⇒ 1
Note that the complete transparency of \R
can cause surprising
effects if you use number registers like .k
, which get evaluated
at the time they are accessed.
.ll 1.6i . aaa bbb ccc ddd eee fff ggg hhh\R':k \n[.k]' .tm :k == \n[:k] ⇒ :k == 126950 . .br . aaa bbb ccc ddd eee fff ggg hhh\h'0'\R':k \n[.k]' .tm :k == \n[:k] ⇒ :k == 15000
If you process this with the POSTSCRIPT device (-Tps
),
there will be a line break eventually after ggg
in both input
lines. However, after processing the space after ggg
, the
partially collected line is not overfull yet, so troff
continues to collect input until it sees the space (or in this case,
the newline) after hhh
. At this point, the line is longer
than the line length, and the line gets broken.
In the first input line, since the \R
escape leaves no traces,
the check for the overfull line hasn’t been done yet at the point where
\R
gets handled, and you get a value for the .k
number
register that is even greater than the current line length.
In the second input line, the insertion of \h'0'
to emit an
invisible zero-width space forces troff
to check the line length,
which in turn causes the start of a new output line. Now .k
returns the expected value.
Both nr
and \R
have two additional special forms to
increment or decrement a register.
Increment (decrement) register ident by value.
.nr a 1 .nr a +1 \na ⇒ 2
To assign the negated value of a register to another register, some care must be taken to get the desired result:
.nr a 7 .nr b 3 .nr a -\nb \na ⇒ 4 .nr a (-\nb) \na ⇒ -3
The surrounding parentheses prevent the interpretation of the minus sign as a decrementing operator. An alternative is to start the assignment with a ‘0’:
.nr a 7 .nr b -3 .nr a \nb \na ⇒ 4 .nr a 0\nb \na ⇒ -3
Remove number register ident. If ident doesn’t exist, the request is ignored.
Rename number register ident1 to ident2. If either ident1 or ident2 doesn’t exist, the request is ignored.
Create an alias ident1 for a number register ident2. The new name and the old name are exactly equivalent. If ident1 is undefined, a warning of type ‘reg’ is generated, and the request is ignored. See Debugging, for information about warnings.
Next: Auto-increment, Previous: Setting Registers, Up: Registers [Contents][Index]
Numeric registers can be accessed via the \n
escape.
Interpolate number register with name ident (one-character
name i, two-character name id). This means that the
value of the register is expanded in-place while gtroff
is
parsing the input line. Nested assignments (also called indirect
assignments) are possible.
.nr a 5 .nr as \na+\na \n(as ⇒ 10
.nr a1 5 .nr ab 6 .ds str b .ds num 1 \n[a\n[num]] ⇒ 5 \n[a\*[str]] ⇒ 6
Next: Assigning Formats, Previous: Interpolating Registers, Up: Registers [Contents][Index]
Number registers can also be auto-incremented and auto-decremented. The
increment or decrement value can be specified with a third argument to
the nr
request or \R
escape.
Set number register ident to value; the increment for
auto-incrementing is set to incr. Note that the \R
escape
doesn’t support this notation.
To activate auto-incrementing, the escape \n
has a special syntax
form.
Before interpolating, increment or decrement ident (one-character
name i, two-character name id) by the auto-increment
value as specified with the nr
request (or the \R
escape).
If no auto-increment value has been specified, these syntax forms are
identical to \n
.
For example,
.nr a 0 1 .nr xx 0 5 .nr foo 0 -2 \n+a, \n+a, \n+a, \n+a, \n+a .br \n-(xx, \n-(xx, \n-(xx, \n-(xx, \n-(xx .br \n+[foo], \n+[foo], \n+[foo], \n+[foo], \n+[foo]
produces
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 -5, -10, -15, -20, -25 -2, -4, -6, -8, -10
To change the increment value without changing the value of a register (a in the example), the following can be used:
.nr a \na 10
Next: Built-in Registers, Previous: Auto-increment, Up: Registers [Contents][Index]
When a register is used, it is always textually replaced (or
interpolated) with a representation of that number. This output format
can be changed to a variety of formats (numbers, Roman numerals, etc.).
This is done using the af
request.
Change the output format of a number register. The first argument ident is the name of the number register to be changed, and the second argument format is the output format. The following output formats are available:
1
Decimal arabic numbers. This is the default format: 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
0…0
Decimal numbers with as many digits as specified. So, ‘00’ would result in printing numbers as 01, 02, 03, ...
In fact, any digit instead of zero does work; gtroff
only counts
how many digits are specified. As a consequence, af
’s default
format ‘1’ could be specified as ‘0’ also (and exactly this is
returned by the \g
escape, see below).
I
Upper-case Roman numerals: 0, I, II, III, IV, ...
i
Lower-case Roman numerals: 0, i, ii, iii, iv, ...
A
Upper-case letters: 0, A, B, C, …, Z, AA, AB, ...
a
Lower-case letters: 0, a, b, c, …, z, aa, ab, ...
Omitting the number register format causes a warning of type ‘missing’. See Debugging, for more details. Specifying a nonexistent format causes an error.
The following example produces ‘10, X, j, 010’:
.nr a 10 .af a 1 \" the default format \na, .af a I \na, .af a a \na, .af a 001 \na
The largest number representable for the ‘i’ and ‘I’ formats
is 39999 (or -39999); Unix troff
uses ‘z’ and
‘w’ to represent 10000 and 5000 in Roman numerals, and so does
gtroff
. Currently, the correct glyphs of Roman numeral five
thousand and Roman numeral ten thousand (Unicode code points
U+2182
and U+2181
, respectively) are not available.
If ident doesn’t exist, it is created.
Changing the output format of a read-only register causes an error. It
is necessary to first copy the register’s value to a writeable register,
then apply the af
request to this other register.
Return the current format of the specified register ident (one-character name i, two-character name id). For example, ‘\ga’ after the previous example would produce the string ‘000’. If the register hasn’t been defined yet, nothing is returned.
Previous: Assigning Formats, Up: Registers [Contents][Index]
The following lists some built-in registers that are not described elsewhere in this manual. Any register that begins with a ‘.’ is read-only. A complete listing of all built-in registers can be found in Register Index.
\n[.F]
This string-valued register returns the current input file name.
\n[.H]
Number of basic units per horizontal unit of output device resolution. See Measurements.
\n[.R]
The number of number registers available. This is always 10000 in
GNU troff
; it exists for backward compatibility.
\n[.U]
If gtroff
is called with the -U command-line option to
activate unsafe mode, the number register .U
is set to 1,
and to zero otherwise. See Groff Options.
\n[.V]
Number of basic units per vertical unit of output device resolution. See Measurements.
\n[seconds]
The number of seconds after the minute, normally in the range 0
to 59, but can be up to 61 to allow for leap seconds.
Initialized at start-up of gtroff
.
\n[minutes]
The number of minutes after the hour, in the range 0 to 59.
Initialized at start-up of gtroff
.
\n[hours]
The number of hours past midnight, in the range 0 to 23.
Initialized at start-up of gtroff
.
\n[dw]
Day of the week (1–7).
\n[dy]
Day of the month (1–31).
\n[mo]
Current month (1–12).
\n[year]
The current year.
\n[yr]
The current year minus 1900. Unfortunately, the documentation of
Unix Version 7’s troff
had a year 2000 bug: It
incorrectly claimed that yr
contains the last two digits of the
year. That claim has never been true of either AT&T
troff
or GNU troff
. Old troff
input that looks
like this:
'\" The following line stopped working after 1999 This document was formatted in 19\n(yr.
can be corrected as follows:
This document was formatted in \n[year].
or, to be portable to older troff
versions, as follows:
.nr y4 1900+\n(yr This document was formatted in \n(y4.
\n[.c]
\n[c.]
The current input line number. Register ‘.c’ is read-only,
whereas ‘c.’ (a gtroff
extension) is writable also,
affecting both ‘.c’ and ‘c.’.
\n[ln]
The current output line number after a call to the nm
request to activate line numbering.
See Miscellaneous, for more information about line numbering.
\n[.x]
The major version number. For example, if the version number is 1.03
then .x
contains ‘1’.
\n[.y]
The minor version number. For example, if the version number is 1.03
then .y
contains ‘03’.
\n[.Y]
The revision number of groff
.
\n[$$]
The process ID of gtroff
.
\n[.g]
Always 1. Macros should use this to determine whether they are
running under GNU troff
.
\n[.A]
If the command-line option -a is used to produce an ASCII approximation of the output, this is set to 1, zero otherwise. See Groff Options.
\n[.O]
This read-only register is set to the suppression nesting level (see
escapes \O
). See Suppressing output.
\n[.P]
This register is set to 1 (and to 0 otherwise) if the current page is actually being printed, i.e., if the -o option is being used to only print selected pages. See Groff Options, for more information.
\n[.T]
If gtroff
is called with the -T command-line option, the
number register .T
is set to 1, and zero otherwise.
See Groff Options.
\*[.T]
A single read-write string register that contains the current output
device (for example, ‘latin1’ or ‘ps’). This is the only
string register defined by gtroff
.
Next: Manipulating Hyphenation, Previous: Registers, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
Various ways of causing breaks were given in Implicit Line Breaks. The br
request likewise causes a break. Several other
requests also cause breaks, but implicitly. These are bp
,
ce
, cf
, fi
, fl
, in
, nf
,
rj
, sp
, ti
, and trf
.
Break the current line, i.e., the input collected so far is emitted without adjustment.
If the no-break control character is used, gtroff
suppresses the
break:
a 'br b ⇒ a b
Initially, gtroff
fills and adjusts text to both margins.
Filling can be disabled via the nf
request and re-enabled with
the fi
request.
Activate fill mode (which is the default). This request implicitly
enables adjusting; it also inserts a break in the text currently being
filled. The read-only number register .u
is set to 1.
The fill mode status is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
See Line Control, for interaction with the \c
escape.
Activate no-fill mode. Input lines are output as-is, retaining line
breaks and ignoring the current line length. This command implicitly
disables adjusting; it also causes a break. The number register
.u
is set to 0.
The fill mode status is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
See Line Control, for interaction with the \c
escape.
Set adjusting mode.
Activation and deactivation of adjusting is done implicitly with calls
to the fi
or nf
requests.
mode can have one of the following values:
l
Adjust text to the left margin. This produces what is traditionally called ragged-right text.
r
Adjust text to the right margin, producing ragged-left text.
c
Center filled text. This is different to the ce
request, which
only centers text without filling.
b
n
Justify to both margins. This is the default used by gtroff
.
Finally, mode can be the numeric argument returned by the
.j
register.
Using ad
without argument is the same as saying
.ad \[.j]
. In particular, gtroff
adjusts lines
in the same way it did before adjusting was deactivated (with a call
to na
, say). For example, this input code
.de AD . br . ad \\$1 .. . .de NA . br . na .. . textA .AD r .nr ad \n[.j] textB .AD c textC .NA textD .AD \" back to centering textE .AD \n[ad] \" back to right justifying textF
produces the following output:
textA textB textC textD textE textF
As just demonstrated, the current adjustment mode is available in the
read-only number register .j
; it can be stored and
subsequently used to set adjustment.
The adjustment mode status is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
Disable adjusting. This request won’t change the current adjustment
mode: A subsequent call to ad
uses the previous adjustment
setting.
The adjustment mode status is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
Break, adjusting the current line per the current adjustment mode.
With \p
, this break will happen at the next word boundary. The
\p
itself is removed entirely, adding neither a break nor a space
where it appears in input; it can thus be placed in the middle of a word
to cause a break at the end of that word.
In most cases this produces very ugly results since gtroff
doesn’t have a sophisticated paragraph building algorithm (as TeX
has, for example); instead, gtroff
fills and adjusts a paragraph
line by line:
This is an uninteresting sentence. This is an uninteresting sentence.\p This is an uninteresting sentence.
is formatted as
This is an uninteresting sentence. This is an uninteresting sentence. This is an uninteresting sentence.
Change the size of a space between words. It takes its units as one twelfth of the space width parameter for the current font. Initially both the word_space_size and sentence_space_size are 12. In fill mode, the values specify the minimum distance.
If two arguments are given to the ss
request, the second argument
sets the sentence space size. If the second argument is not given,
sentence space size is set to word_space_size. The sentence space
size is used in two circumstances: If the end of a sentence occurs at
the end of a line in fill mode, then both an inter-word space and a
sentence space are added; if two spaces follow the end of a sentence in
the middle of a line, then the second space is a sentence space. If a
second argument is never given to the ss
request, the behaviour
of Unix troff
is the same as that exhibited by GNU troff
.
In GNU troff
, as in Unix troff
, a sentence should always
be followed by either a newline or two spaces.
The read-only number registers .ss
and .sss
hold the
values of the parameters set by the first and second arguments of the
ss
request.
The word space and sentence space values are associated with the current environment (see Environments).
Contrary to AT&T troff
, this request is not
ignored if a TTY output device is used; the given values are then
rounded down to a multiple of 12 (see Implementation Differences).
The request is ignored if there is no parameter.
Another useful application of the ss
request is to insert
discardable horizontal space, i.e., space that is discarded at a line
break. For example, paragraph-style footnotes could be separated this
way:
.ll 4.5i 1.\ This is the first footnote.\c .ss 48 .nop .ss 12 2.\ This is the second footnote.
The result:
1. This is the first footnote. 2. This is the second footnote.
Note that the \h
escape produces unbreakable space.
Center text. While the ‘.ad c’ request also centers text, it
fills the text as well. ce
does not fill the text it affects.
This request causes a break. The number of lines still to be centered
is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
The following example demonstrates the differences. Here is the input:
.ll 4i .ce 1000 This is a small text fragment that shows the differences between the `.ce' and the `.ad c' request. .ce 0 .ad c This is a small text fragment that shows the differences between the `.ce' and the `.ad c' request.
And here the result:
This is a small text fragment that shows the differences between the `.ce' and the `.ad c' request. This is a small text fragment that shows the differences between the `.ce' and the `.ad c' request.
With no arguments, ce
centers the next line of text. nnn
specifies the number of lines to be centered. If the argument is zero
or negative, centering is disabled.
The basic length for centering text is the line length (as set with the
ll
request) minus the indentation (as set with the in
request). Temporary indentation is ignored.
As can be seen in the previous example, it is a common idiom to turn on centering for a large number of lines, and to turn off centering after text to be centered. This is useful for any request that takes a number of lines as an argument.
The .ce
read-only number register contains the number of lines
remaining to be centered, as set by the ce
request.
Justify unfilled text to the right margin. Arguments are identical to
the ce
request. The .rj
read-only number register is the
number of lines to be right-justified as set by the rj
request.
This request causes a break. The number of lines still to be
right-justified is associated with the current environment
(see Environments).
Next: Manipulating Spacing, Previous: Manipulating Filling and Adjusting, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
Here a description of requests that influence hyphenation.
Enable hyphenation. The request has an optional numeric argument, mode, to restrict hyphenation if necessary:
1
The default argument if mode is omitted: hyphenation is enabled,
and the first and the last characters of a word are not hyphenated.
This is also the start-up value of gtroff
.
2
Do not hyphenate the last word on a page or column.
4
Do not hyphenate the last two characters of a word.
8
Do not hyphenate the first two characters of a word.
16
Allow hyphenation before the last character of a word.
32
Allow hyphenation after the first character of a word.
The values in the previous table are additive. For example,
value 12 causes gtroff
to neither hyphenate the last two nor
the first two characters of a word. Note that value 13 would do
exactly the same; in other words, value 1 need not be added if the
value is larger than 1.
Some values cannot be used together because they contradict; for instance, values 4 and 16, and values 8 and 32.
The number of characters at the beginning of a word after which the first hyphenation point should be inserted is determined by the patterns themselves; it can’t be reduced further without introducing additional, invalid hyphenation points (unfortunately, this information is not part of a pattern file, you have to know it in advance). The same is true for the number of characters at the end of word before the last hyphenation point should be inserted. For example, the code
.ll 1 .hy 48 splitting
returns
s- plit- t- in- g
instead of the correct ‘split-ting’. US-English patterns as distributed
with groff need two characters at the beginning and three characters at
the end; this means that value 4 of hy
is mandatory.
Value 8 is possible as an additional restriction, but values 1
(the default!), 16, and 32 should be avoided.
Here is a table of left and right minimum values for hyphenation as needed
by the patterns distributed with groff; see the groff_tmac(5) man
page (type man groff_tmac
at the command line) for more
information on groff’s language macro files.
language | pattern name | left min | right min |
---|---|---|---|
Czech | cs | 2 | 2 |
US English | us | 2 | 3 |
French | fr | 2 | 3 |
German traditional | det | 2 | 2 |
German reformed | den | 2 | 2 |
Swedish | sv | 1 | 2 |
Hyphenation exceptions within pattern files (i.e., the words within a
\hyphenation
group) also obey the hyphenation restrictions given
by hy
. However, exceptions specified with the hw
do not.
The current hyphenation restrictions can be found in the read-only number register ‘.hy’.
The hyphenation mode is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
Disable hyphenation (i.e., set the hyphenation mode to zero). Note that
the hyphenation mode of the last call to hy
is not remembered.
The hyphenation mode is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
Set the maximum number of consecutive hyphenated lines to nnn. If
this number is negative, there is no maximum. The default value
is -1 if nnn is omitted. This value is associated
with the current environment (see Environments). Only lines output
from a given environment count towards the maximum associated with that
environment. Hyphens resulting from \%
are counted; explicit
hyphens are not.
The current setting of hlm
is available in the .hlm
read-only number register. Also the number of immediately preceding
consecutive hyphenated lines are available in the read-only number
register ‘.hlc’.
Define how word1, word2, etc. are to be hyphenated. The words must be given with hyphens at the hyphenation points. For example:
.hw in-sa-lub-rious
Besides the space character, any character whose hyphenation code value
is zero can be used to separate the arguments of hw
(see the
documentation for the hcode
request below for more information).
In addition, this request can be used more than once.
Hyphenation points specified with hw
are not subject to the
restrictions given by the hy
request.
Hyphenation exceptions specified with the hw
request are
associated with the current hyphenation language; it causes an error if
there is no current hyphenation language.
This request is ignored if there is no parameter.
In old versions of troff
there was a limited amount of space to
store such information; fortunately, with gtroff
, this is no
longer a restriction.
To tell gtroff
how to hyphenate words on the fly, use the
\%
escape, also known as the hyphenation character.
Preceding a word with this character prevents it from being
hyphenated; putting it inside a word indicates to gtroff
that
the word may be hyphenated at that point. Note that this mechanism
only affects that one occurrence of the word; to change the
hyphenation of a word for the entire document, use the hw
request.
The \:
escape inserts a zero-width break point (that is, the word
breaks but without adding a hyphen).
... check the /var/log/\:httpd/\:access_log file ...
Note that \X
and \Y
start a word, that is, the \%
escape in (say) ‘\X'...'\%foobar’ and
‘\Y'...'\%foobar’ no longer prevents hyphenation but inserts a
hyphenation point at the beginning of ‘foobar’; most likely this
isn’t what you want to do.
Change the hyphenation character to char. This character then
works the same as the \%
escape, and thus, no longer appears in
the output. Without an argument, hc
resets the hyphenation
character to be \%
(the default) only.
The hyphenation character is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
Read in a file of hyphenation patterns. This file is searched for in the same way as name.tmac (or tmac.name) is searched for if the -mname option is specified.
It should have the same format as (simple) TeX patterns files. More specifically, the following scanning rules are implemented.
\$
.
^^xx
(x is 0–9 or a–f) and ^^x
(character code of x in the range 0–127) are recognized; other use
of ^
causes an error.
hpf
checks for the expression \patterns{…}
(possibly with whitespace before and after the braces). Everything
between the braces is taken as hyphenation patterns. Consequently,
{
and }
are not allowed in patterns.
\hyphenation{…}
gives a list of hyphenation
exceptions.
\endinput
is recognized also.
\patterns
is missing, the whole
file is treated as a list of hyphenation patterns (only recognizing the
%
character as the start of a comment).
If no hpf
request is specified (either in the document or in a
macro package), gtroff
won’t hyphenate at all.
The hpfa
request appends a file of patterns to the current list.
The hpfcode
request defines mapping values for character codes in
hyphenation patterns. hpf
or hpfa
then apply the mapping
(after reading the patterns) before replacing or appending them to the
current list of patterns. Its arguments are pairs of character codes –
integers from 0 to 255. The request maps character
code a to code b, code c to
code d, and so on. You can use character codes that would
be invalid otherwise. By default, everything maps to itself except
letters ‘A’ to ‘Z’, which map to ‘a’ to ‘z’.
The set of hyphenation patterns is associated with the current language
set by the hla
request. The hpf
request is usually
invoked by the troffrc or troffrc-end file; by default,
troffrc loads hyphenation patterns and exceptions for American
English (in files hyphen.us and hyphenex.us).
A second call to hpf
(for the same language) replaces the
hyphenation patterns with the new ones.
Invoking hpf
causes an error if there is no current hyphenation
language.
Set the hyphenation code of character c1 to code1, that of c2 to code2, etc. A hyphenation code must be a single input character (not a special character) other than a digit or a space.
To make hyphenation work, hyphenation codes must be set up. At
start-up, groff only assigns hyphenation codes to the letters
‘a’–‘z’ (mapped to themselves) and to the letters
‘A’–‘Z’ (mapped to ‘a’–‘z’); all other hyphenation
codes are set to zero. Normally, hyphenation patterns contain only
lowercase letters, which should be applied regardless of case. In
other words, the words ‘FOO’ and ‘Foo’ should be hyphenated exactly the
same way as the word ‘foo’ is hyphenated, and this is what hcode
is good for. Words that contain other letters won’t be hyphenated
properly if the corresponding hyphenation patterns actually do contain
them. For example, the following hcode
requests are necessary to
assign hyphenation codes to the letters ‘ÄäÖöÜüß’ (this is needed
for German):
.hcode ä ä Ä ä .hcode ö ö Ö ö .hcode ü ü Ü ü .hcode ß ß
Without those assignments, groff treats German words like ‘Kindergärten’ (the plural form of ‘kindergarten’) as two substrings ‘kinderg’ and ‘rten’ because the hyphenation code of the umlaut a is zero by default. There is a German hyphenation pattern that covers ‘kinder’, so groff finds the hyphenation ‘kin-der’. The other two hyphenation points (‘kin-der-gär-ten’) are missed.
This request is ignored if it has no parameter.
Set the (right) hyphenation margin to length. If the current adjustment mode is not ‘b’ or ‘n’, the line is not hyphenated if it is shorter than length. Without an argument, the hyphenation margin is reset to its default value, which is 0. The default scaling indicator for this request is ‘m’. The hyphenation margin is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
A negative argument resets the hyphenation margin to zero, emitting a warning of type ‘range’.
The current hyphenation margin is available in the .hym
read-only
number register.
Set the hyphenation space to hyphenation_space. If the current adjustment mode is ‘b’ or ‘n’, don’t hyphenate the line if it can be justified by adding no more than hyphenation_space extra space to each word space. Without argument, the hyphenation space is set to its default value, which is 0. The default scaling indicator for this request is ‘m’. The hyphenation space is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
A negative argument resets the hyphenation space to zero, emitting a warning of type ‘range’.
The current hyphenation space is available in the .hys
read-only
number register.
Set the soft hyphen character to glyph.14 If the
argument is omitted, the soft hyphen character is set to the default
glyph \(hy
(this is the start-up value of gtroff
also).
The soft hyphen character is the glyph that is inserted when a word is
hyphenated at a line break. If the soft hyphen character does not exist
in the font of the character immediately preceding a potential break
point, then the line is not broken at that point. Neither definitions
(specified with the char
request) nor translations (specified
with the tr
request) are considered when finding the soft hyphen
character.
Set the current hyphenation language to the string language.
Hyphenation exceptions specified with the hw
request and
hyphenation patterns specified with the hpf
and hpfa
requests are both associated with the current hyphenation language. The
hla
request is usually invoked by the troffrc or the
troffrc-end files; troffrc sets the default language to
‘us’.
The current hyphenation language is available as a string in the read-only number register ‘.hla’.
.ds curr_language \n[.hla] \*[curr_language] ⇒ us
Next: Tabs and Fields, Previous: Manipulating Hyphenation, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
Space downwards distance. With no argument it advances
1 line. A negative argument causes gtroff
to move up the
page the specified distance. If the argument is preceded by a ‘|’
then gtroff
moves that distance from the top of the page. This
request causes a line break, and that adds the current line spacing to
the space you have just specified. The default scaling indicator is
‘v’.
For convenience you may wish to use the following macros to set the height of the next line at a given distance from the top or the bottom of the page:
.de y-from-top-down . sp |\\$1-\\n[.v]u .. . .de y-from-bot-up . sp |\\n[.p]u-\\$1-\\n[.v]u ..
A call to ‘.y-from-bot-up 10c’ means that the bottom of the next line will be at 10 cm from the paper edge at the bottom.
If a vertical trap is sprung during execution of sp
, the amount
of vertical space after the trap is discarded. For example, this
.de xxx .. . .wh 0 xxx . .pl 5v foo .sp 2 bar .sp 50 baz
results in
foo bar baz
The amount of discarded space is available in the number register
.trunc
.
To protect sp
against vertical traps, use the vpt
request:
.vpt 0 .sp -3 .vpt 1
Output nnn-1 blank lines after each line of text. With
no argument, gtroff
uses the previous value before the last
ls
call.
.ls 2 \" This causes double-spaced output .ls 3 \" This causes triple-spaced output .ls \" Again double-spaced
The line spacing is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
The read-only number register .L
contains the current line
spacing setting.
See Changing Type Sizes, for the requests vs
and pvs
as
alternatives to ls
.
Sometimes, extra vertical spacing is only needed occasionally, e.g. to
allow space for a tall construct (like an equation). The \x
escape does this. The escape is given a numerical argument, usually
enclosed in quotes (like ‘\x'3p'’); the default scaling indicator
is ‘v’. If this number is positive extra vertical space is
inserted below the current line. A negative number adds space above.
If this escape is used multiple times on the same line, the maximum of
the values is used.
See Escapes, for details on parameter delimiting characters.
The .a
read-only number register contains the most recent
(non-negative) extra vertical line space.
Using \x
can be necessary in combination with the \b
escape, as the following example shows.
This is a test with the \[rs]b escape. .br This is a test with the \[rs]b escape. .br This is a test with \b'xyz'\x'-1m'\x'1m'. .br This is a test with the \[rs]b escape. .br This is a test with the \[rs]b escape.
produces
This is a test with the \b escape. This is a test with the \b escape. x This is a test with y. z This is a test with the \b escape. This is a test with the \b escape.
Enable no-space mode. In this mode, spacing (either via sp
or via blank lines) is disabled. The bp
request to advance to
the next page is also disabled, except if it is accompanied by a page
number (see Page Control, for more information). This mode ends
when actual text is output or the rs
request is encountered, which
ends no-space mode. The read-only number register .ns
is set
to 1 as long as no-space mode is active.
This request is useful for macros that conditionally insert vertical space before the text starts (for example, a paragraph macro could insert some space except when it is the first paragraph after a section header).
Next: Character Translations, Previous: Manipulating Spacing, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
A tab character (ASCII char 9, EBCDIC char 5) causes a horizontal movement to the next tab stop (much like it did on a typewriter).
This escape is a non-interpreted tab character. In copy mode
(see Copy-in Mode), \t
is the same as a real tab character.
Change tab stop positions. This request takes a series of tab specifiers as arguments (optionally divided into two groups with the letter ‘T’) that indicate where each tab stop is to be (overriding any previous settings).
Tab stops can be specified absolutely, i.e., as the distance from the left margin. For example, the following sets 6 tab stops every one inch.
.ta 1i 2i 3i 4i 5i 6i
Tab stops can also be specified using a leading ‘+’, which means that the specified tab stop is set relative to the previous tab stop. For example, the following is equivalent to the previous example.
.ta 1i +1i +1i +1i +1i +1i
gtroff
supports an extended syntax to specify repeat values after
the ‘T’ mark (these values are always taken as relative) – this is
the usual way to specify tabs set at equal intervals. The following is,
yet again, the same as the previous examples. It does even more since
it defines an infinite number of tab stops separated by one inch.
.ta T 1i
Now we are ready to interpret the full syntax given at the beginning: Set tabs at positions n1, n2, …, nn and then set tabs at nn+r1, nn+r2, …, nn+rn and then at nn+rn+r1, nn+rn+r2, …, nn+rn+rn, and so on.
Example: ‘4c +6c T 3c 5c 2c’ is equivalent to ‘4c 10c 13c 18c 20c 23c 28c 30c …’.
The material in each tab column (i.e., the column between two tab stops) may be justified to the right or left or centered in the column. This is specified by appending ‘R’, ‘L’, or ‘C’ to the tab specifier. The default justification is ‘L’. Example:
.ta 1i 2iC 3iR
Some notes:
ta
request is ‘m’.
.ds foo a\tb\tc .ta T 5i \*[foo]
creates a single line, which is a bit longer than 10 inches (a string is used to show exactly where the tab characters are). Now consider the following:
.ds bar a\tb b\tc .ta T 5i \*[bar]
gtroff
first converts the tab stops of the line into unbreakable
horizontal movements, then splits the line after the second ‘b’
(assuming a sufficiently short line length). Usually, this isn’t what
the user wants.
.ds Z foo\tbar\tfoo .ds ZZ foo\tbar\tfoobar .ds ZZZ foo\tbar\tfoo\tbar .ta 2i 4iR \*[Z] .br \*[ZZ] .br \*[ZZZ] .br
which produces the following output:
foo bar foo foo bar foobar foo bar foobar
The first line right-justifies the second ‘foo’ relative to the tab stop. The second line right-justifies ‘foobar’. The third line finally right-justifies only ‘foo’ because of the additional tab character, which marks the end of the string belonging to the last defined tab stop.
ta
without an argument removes all tab stops.
gtroff
is ‘T 0.5i’.
The read-only number register .tabs
contains a string
representation of the current tab settings suitable for use as an
argument to the ta
request.
.ds tab-string \n[.tabs] \*[tab-string] ⇒ T120u
The troff
version of the Plan 9 operating system uses
register .S
for the same purpose.
Normally gtroff
fills the space to the next tab stop with
whitespace. This can be changed with the tc
request. With no
argument gtroff
reverts to using whitespace, which is the
default. The value of this tab repetition character is associated
with the current environment (see Environments).15
If n is missing or not zero, enable line-tabs mode, or
disable it otherwise (the default). In line-tabs mode, gtroff
computes tab distances relative to the (current) output line instead of
the input line.
For example, the following code:
.ds x a\t\c .ds y b\t\c .ds z c .ta 1i 3i \*x \*y \*z
in normal mode, results in the output
a b c
in line-tabs mode, the same code outputs
a b c
Line-tabs mode is associated with the current environment. The
read-only register .linetabs
is set to 1 if in line-tabs
mode, and 0 in normal mode.
• Leaders: | ||
• Fields: |
Next: Fields, Previous: Tabs and Fields, Up: Tabs and Fields [Contents][Index]
Sometimes it may be desirable to use the tc
request to fill a
particular tab stop with a given glyph (for example dots in a table of
contents), but also normal tab stops on the rest of the line.
For this gtroff
provides an alternate tab mechanism, called
leaders, which does just that.
A leader character (character code 1) behaves similarly to a tab character: It moves to the next tab stop. The only difference is that for this movement, the fill glyph defaults to a period character and not to space.
This escape is a non-interpreted leader character. In copy mode
(see Copy-in Mode), \a
is the same as a real leader
character.
Declare the leader repetition character.16
Without an argument, leaders act the same as tabs (i.e., using
whitespace for filling). gtroff
’s start-up value is a dot
(‘.’). The value of the leader repetition character is associated
with the current environment (see Environments).
For a table of contents, to name an example, tab stops may be defined so that the section number is one tab stop, the title is the second with the remaining space being filled with a line of dots, and then the page number slightly separated from the dots.
.ds entry 1.1\tFoo\a\t12 .lc . .ta 1i 5i +.25i \*[entry]
This produces
1.1 Foo.......................................... 12
Previous: Leaders, Up: Tabs and Fields [Contents][Index]
Fields are a more general way of laying out tabular data. A field
is defined as the data between a pair of delimiting characters.
It contains substrings that are separated by padding characters.
The width of a field is the distance on the input line from the
position where the field starts to the next tab stop. A padding
character inserts stretchable space similar to TeX’s \hss
command (thus it can even be negative) to make the sum of all substring
lengths plus the stretchable space equal to the field width. If more
than one padding character is inserted, the available space is evenly
distributed among them.
Define a delimiting and a padding character for fields. If the latter is missing, the padding character defaults to a space character. If there is no argument at all, the field mechanism is disabled (which is the default). Note that contrary to e.g. the tab repetition character, delimiting and padding characters are not associated to the current environment (see Environments).
Example:
.fc # ^ .ta T 3i #foo^bar^smurf# .br #foo^^bar^smurf#
and here the result:
foo bar smurf foo bar smurf
Next: Troff and Nroff Mode, Previous: Tabs and Fields, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
The control character (‘.’) and the no-break control character
(‘'’) can be changed with the cc
and c2
requests,
respectively.
Set the control character to c. With no argument the default control character ‘.’ is restored. The value of the control character is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
Set the no-break control character to c. With no argument the default control character ‘'’ is restored. The value of the no-break control character is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
See Requests.
Disable the escape mechanism completely. After executing this request, the backslash character ‘\’ no longer starts an escape sequence.
This request can be very helpful in writing macros since it is not necessary then to double the escape character. Here an example:
.\" This is a simplified version of the .\" .BR request from the man macro package .eo .de BR . ds result \& . while (\n[.$] >= 2) \{\ . as result \fB\$1\fR\$2 . shift 2 . \} . if \n[.$] .as result \fB\$1 \*[result] . ft R .. .ec
Set the escape character to c. With no argument the default
escape character ‘\’ is restored. It can be also used to re-enable
the escape mechanism after an eo
request.
Note that changing the escape character globally likely breaks macro
packages since gtroff
has no mechanism to ‘intern’ macros, i.e.,
to convert a macro definition into an internal form that is independent
of its representation (TeX has this mechanism). If a macro is
called, it is executed literally.
The ecs
request saves the current escape character in an internal
register. Use this request in combination with the ec
request to
temporarily change the escape character.
The ecr
request restores the escape character saved with
ecs
. Without a previous call to ecs
, this request sets
the escape character to \
.
Print the current escape character (which is the backslash character ‘\’ by default).
\\
is a ‘delayed’ backslash; more precisely, it is the default
escape character followed by a backslash, which no longer has special
meaning due to the leading escape character. It is not an escape
sequence in the usual sense! In any unknown escape sequence
\X
the escape character is ignored and X is printed.
But if X is equal to the current escape character, no warning is
emitted.
As a consequence, only at top-level or in a diversion a backslash glyph is printed; in copy-in mode, it expands to a single backslash, which then combines with the following character to an escape sequence.
The \E
escape differs from \e
by printing an escape
character that is not interpreted in copy mode. Use this to define
strings with escapes that work when used in copy mode (for example, as a
macro argument). The following example defines strings to begin and end
a superscript:
.ds { \v'-.3m'\s'\En[.s]*60/100' .ds } \s0\v'.3m'
Another example to demonstrate the differences between the various escape sequences, using a strange escape character, ‘-’.
.ec - .de xxx --A'foo' .. .xxx ⇒ -A'foo'
The result is surprising for most users, expecting ‘1’ since ‘foo’ is a valid identifier. What has happened? As mentioned above, the leading escape character makes the following character ordinary. Written with the default escape character the sequence ‘--’ becomes ‘\-’ – this is the minus sign.
If the escape character followed by itself is a valid escape sequence,
only \E
yields the expected result:
.ec - .de xxx -EA'foo' .. .xxx ⇒ 1
Similar to \\
, the sequence \.
isn’t a real escape
sequence. As before, a warning message is suppressed if the escape
character is followed by a dot, and the dot itself is printed.
.de foo . nop foo . . de bar . nop bar \\.. . .. .foo .bar ⇒ foo bar
The first backslash is consumed while the macro is read, and the second
is swallowed while executing macro foo
.
A translation is a mapping of an input character to an output glyph. The mapping occurs at output time, i.e., the input character gets assigned the metric information of the mapped output character right before input tokens are converted to nodes (see Gtroff Internals, for more on this process).
Translate character a to glyph b, character c to glyph d, etc. If there is an odd number of arguments, the last one is translated to an unstretchable space (‘\ ’).
The trin
request is identical to tr
, but when you unformat
a diversion with asciify
it ignores the translation.
See Diversions, for details about the asciify
request.
Some notes:
\(xx
, \[xxx]
,
\C'xxx'
, \'
, \`
, \-
, \_
),
glyphs defined with the char
request, and numbered glyphs
(\N'xxx'
) can be translated also.
\e
escape can be translated also.
\%
and \~
escapes (but
\%
and \~
can’t be mapped onto another glyph).
\a
), tab (and
\t
).
shc
request.
.tr a\& foo bar ⇒ foo br
It is even possible to map the space character to nothing:
.tr aa \& foo bar ⇒ foobar
As shown in the example, the space character can’t be the first
character/glyph pair as an argument of tr
. Additionally, it is
not possible to map the space character to any other glyph; requests
like ‘.tr aa x’ undo ‘.tr aa \&’ instead.
If justification is active, lines are justified in spite of the ‘empty’ space character (but there is no minimal distance, i.e. the space character, between words).
tr
.
tr
does not check whether the entities in its
argument do exist.
See Gtroff Internals.
troff
no longer has a hard-coded dependency on Latin-1; all
charXXX
entities have been removed from the font
description files. This has a notable consequence that shows up in
warnings like can't find character with input code XXX
if
the tr
request isn’t handled properly.
Consider the following translation:
.tr éÉ
This maps input character é
onto glyph É
, which is
identical to glyph char201
. But this glyph intentionally doesn’t
exist! Instead, \[char201]
is treated as an input character
entity and is by default mapped onto \['E]
, and gtroff
doesn’t handle translations of translations.
The right way to write the above translation is
.tr é\['E]
In other words, the first argument of tr
should be an input
character or entity, and the second one a glyph entity.
tr
request is ignored.
trnt
is the same as the tr
request except that the
translations do not apply to text that is transparently throughput into
a diversion with \!
. See Diversions, for more information.
For example,
.tr ab .di x \!.tm a .di .x
prints ‘b’ to the standard error stream; if trnt
is used
instead of tr
it prints ‘a’.
Next: Line Layout, Previous: Character Translations, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
Originally, nroff
and troff
were two separate programs,
the former for TTY output, the latter for everything else. With GNU
troff
, both programs are merged into one executable, sending its
output to a device driver (grotty
for TTY devices, grops
for POSTSCRIPT, etc.) which interprets the intermediate output of
gtroff
. For Unix troff
it makes sense to talk about
Nroff mode and Troff mode since the differences are
hardcoded. For GNU troff
, this distinction is not appropriate
because gtroff
simply takes the information given in the font
files for a particular device without handling requests specially if a
TTY output device is used.
Usually, a macro package can be used with all output devices.
Nevertheless, it is sometimes necessary to make a distinction between
TTY and non-TTY devices: gtroff
provides two built-in conditions
‘n’ and ‘t’ for the if
, ie
, and while
requests to decide whether gtroff
shall behave like nroff
or like troff
.
Make the ‘t’ built-in condition true (and the ‘n’ built-in
condition false) for if
, ie
, and while
conditional
requests. This is the default if gtroff
(not
groff
) is started with the -R switch to avoid loading of
the start-up files troffrc and troffrc-end. Without
-R, gtroff
stays in troff mode if the output device is
not a TTY (e.g. ‘ps’).
Make the ‘n’ built-in condition true (and the ‘t’ built-in
condition false) for if
, ie
, and while
conditional
requests. This is the default if gtroff
uses a TTY output
device; the code for switching to nroff mode is in the file
tty.tmac, which is loaded by the start-up file troffrc
.
See Conditionals and Loops, for more details on built-in conditions.
Next: Line Control, Previous: Troff and Nroff Mode, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
The following drawing shows the dimensions that gtroff
uses for
placing a line of output onto the page. They are labeled with the
request that manipulates each dimension.
-->| in |<-- |<-----------ll------------>| +----+----+----------------------+----+ | : : : | +----+----+----------------------+----+ -->| po |<-- |<--------paper width---------------->|
These dimensions are:
po
Page offset – this is the leftmost position of text on the final output, defining the left margin.
in
Indentation – this is the distance from the left margin where text is printed.
ll
Line length – this is the distance from the left margin to right margin.
A simple demonstration:
.ll 3i This is text without indentation. The line length has been set to 3\~inch. .in +.5i .ll -.5i Now the left and right margins are both increased. .in .ll Calling .in and .ll without parameters restore the previous values.
Result:
This is text without indenta- tion. The line length has been set to 3 inch. Now the left and right margins are both increased. Calling .in and .ll without parameters restore the previ- ous values.
Set horizontal page offset to offset (or increment or decrement the current value by offset). Note that this request does not cause a break, so changing the page offset in the middle of text being filled may not yield the expected result. The initial value is 1i. For TTY output devices, it is set to 0 in the startup file troffrc; the default scaling indicator is ‘m’ (and not ‘v’ as incorrectly documented in the original Unix troff manual).
The current page offset can be found in the read-only number register ‘.o’.
If po
is called without an argument, the page offset is reset to
the previous value before the last call to po
.
.po 3i \n[.o] ⇒ 720 .po -1i \n[.o] ⇒ 480 .po \n[.o] ⇒ 720
Set indentation to indent (or increment or decrement the current value by indent). This request causes a break. Initially, there is no indentation.
If in
is called without an argument, the indentation is reset to
the previous value before the last call to in
. The default
scaling indicator is ‘m’.
The indentation is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
If a negative indentation value is specified (which is not allowed),
gtroff
emits a warning of type ‘range’ and sets the
indentation to zero.
The effect of in
is delayed until a partially collected line (if
it exists) is output. A temporary indentation value is reset to zero
also.
The current indentation (as set by in
) can be found in the
read-only number register ‘.i’.
Temporarily indent the next output line by offset. If an
increment or decrement value is specified, adjust the temporary
indentation relative to the value set by the in
request.
This request causes a break; its value is associated with the current
environment (see Environments). The default scaling indicator is
‘m’. A call of ti
without an argument is ignored.
If the total indentation value is negative (which is not allowed),
gtroff
emits a warning of type ‘range’ and sets the
temporary indentation to zero. ‘Total indentation’ is either
offset if specified as an absolute value, or the temporary plus
normal indentation, if offset is given as a relative value.
The effect of ti
is delayed until a partially collected line (if
it exists) is output.
The read-only number register .in
is the indentation that applies
to the current output line.
The difference between .i
and .in
is that the latter takes
into account whether a partially collected line still uses the old
indentation value or a temporary indentation value is active.
Set the line length to length (or increment or decrement the
current value by length). Initially, the line length is set to
6.5i. The effect of ll
is delayed until a partially
collected line (if it exists) is output. The default scaling indicator
is ‘m’.
If ll
is called without an argument, the line length is reset to
the previous value before the last call to ll
. If a negative
line length is specified (which is not allowed), gtroff
emits a
warning of type ‘range’ and sets the line length to zero.
The line length is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
The current line length (as set by ll
) can be found in the
read-only number register ‘.l’. The read-only number register
.ll
is the line length that applies to the current output line.
Similar to .i
and .in
, the difference between .l
and .ll
is that the latter takes into account whether a partially
collected line still uses the old line length value.
Next: Page Layout, Previous: Line Layout, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
It is important to understand how gtroff
handles input and output
lines.
Many escapes use positioning relative to the input line. For example, this
This is a \h'|1.2i'test. This is a \h'|1.2i'test.
produces
This is a test. This is a test.
The main usage of this feature is to define macros that act exactly at the place where called.
.\" A simple macro to underline a word .de underline . nop \\$1\l'|0\[ul]' ..
In the above example, ‘|0’ specifies a negative distance from the
current position (at the end of the just emitted argument \$1
)
back to the beginning of the input line. Thus, the ‘\l’ escape
draws a line from right to left.
gtroff
makes a difference between input and output line
continuation; the latter is also called interrupting a line.
Continue a line. \RET
(this is a backslash at the end of a
line immediately followed by a newline) works on the input level,
suppressing the effects of the following newline in the input.
This is a \ .test ⇒ This is a .test
The ‘|’ operator is also affected.
\c
works on the output level. Anything after this escape on the
same line is ignored except \R
, which works as usual. Anything
before \c
on the same line is appended to the current partial
output line. The next non-command line after an interrupted line counts
as a new input line.
The visual results depend on whether no-fill mode is active.
nf
request), the next input
text line after \c
is handled as a continuation of the same input
text line.
.nf This is a \c test. ⇒ This is a test.
fi
request), a word interrupted
with \c
is continued with the text on the next input text line,
without an intervening space.
This is a te\c st. ⇒ This is a test.
Note that an intervening control line that causes a break is stronger
than \c
, flushing out the current partial line in the usual way.
The .int
register contains a positive value if the last output
line was interrupted with \c
; this is associated with the current
environment (see Environments).
Next: Page Control, Previous: Line Control, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
gtroff
provides some very primitive operations for controlling
page layout.
Set the page length to length (or increment or decrement the current value by length). This is the length of the physical output page. The default scaling indicator is ‘v’.
The current setting can be found in the read-only number register ‘.p’.
Note that this only specifies the size of the page, not the top and
bottom margins. Those are not set by gtroff
directly.
See Traps, for further information on how to do this.
Negative pl
values are possible also, but not very useful: No
trap is sprung, and each line is output on a single page (thus
suppressing all vertical spacing).
If no argument or an invalid argument is given, pl
sets the page
length to 11i.
gtroff
provides several operations that help in setting up top
and bottom titles (or headers and footers).
Print a title line. It consists of three parts: a left justified
portion, a centered portion, and a right justified portion. The
argument separator ‘'’ can be replaced with any character not
occurring in the title line. The ‘%’ character is replaced with
the current page number. This character can be changed with the
pc
request (see below).
Without argument, tl
is ignored.
Some notes:
ll
request is not honoured by
tl
; use the lt
request (described below) instead, to
control line length for text set by tl
.
tl
prints the title line immediately, ignoring a partially filled
line (which stays untouched).
tl
accepts the same parameter delimiting characters as the
\A
escape; see Escapes.
The title line is printed using its own line length, which is specified
(or incremented or decremented) with the lt
request. Initially,
the title line length is set to 6.5i. If a negative line length
is specified (which is not allowed), gtroff
emits a warning of
type ‘range’ and sets the title line length to zero. The default
scaling indicator is ‘m’. If lt
is called without an
argument, the title length is reset to the previous value before the
last call to lt
.
The current setting of this is available in the .lt
read-only
number register; it is associated with the current environment
(see Environments).
Change (increase or decrease) the page number of the next page. The only argument is the page number; the request is ignored without a parameter.
The read-only number register .pn
contains the number of the next
page: either the value set by a pn
request, or the number of the
current page plus 1.
Change the page number character (used by the tl
request) to a
different character. With no argument, this mechanism is disabled.
Note that this doesn’t affect the number register %
.
See Traps.
Next: Fonts and Symbols, Previous: Page Layout, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
Stop processing the current page and move to the next page. This
request causes a break. It can also take an argument to set (increase,
decrease) the page number of the next page (which actually becomes the
current page after bp
has finished). The difference between
bp
and pn
is that pn
does not cause a break or
actually eject a page. See Page Layout.
.de newpage \" define macro 'bp \" begin page 'sp .5i \" vertical space .tl 'left top'center top'right top' \" title 'sp .3i \" vertical space .. \" end macro
bp
has no effect if not called within the top-level diversion
(see Diversions).
The read-write register %
holds the current page number.
The number register .pe
is set to 1 while bp
is
active. See Page Location Traps.
It is often necessary to force a certain amount of space before a new
page occurs. This is most useful to make sure that there is not a
single orphan line left at the bottom of a page. The ne
request ensures that there is a certain distance, specified by the first
argument, before the next page is triggered (see Traps, for
further information). The default scaling indicator for ne
is
‘v’; the default value of space is 1v if no
argument is given.
For example, to make sure that no fewer than 2 lines get orphaned, do the following before each paragraph:
.ne 2 text text text
ne
then automatically causes a page break if there is space for
one line only.
sv
is similar to the ne
request; it reserves the specified
amount of vertical space. If the desired amount of space exists before
the next trap (or the bottom page boundary if no trap is set), the space
is output immediately (ignoring a partially filled line, which stays
untouched). If there is not enough space, it is stored for later output
via the os
request. The default value is 1v if no
argument is given; the default scaling indicator is ‘v’.
Both sv
and os
ignore no-space mode. While the sv
request allows negative values for space, os
ignores them.
This register contains the current vertical position. If the vertical
position is zero and the top of page transition hasn’t happened yet,
nl
is set to negative value. gtroff
itself does this at
the very beginning of a document before anything has been printed, but
the main usage is to plant a header trap on a page if this page has
already started.
Consider the following:
.de xxx . sp . tl ''Header'' . sp .. . First page. .bp .wh 0 xxx .nr nl (-1) Second page.
Result:
First page. ... Header Second page. ...
Without resetting nl
to a negative value, the just planted trap
would be active beginning with the next page, not the current
one.
See Diversions, for a comparison with the .h
and .d
registers.
Next: Sizes, Previous: Page Control, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
gtroff
can switch fonts at any point in the text.
The basic set of fonts is ‘R’, ‘I’, ‘B’, and ‘BI’. These are Times Roman, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. For non-TTY devices, there is also at least one symbol font that contains various special symbols (Greek, mathematics).
• Changing Fonts: | ||
• Font Families: | ||
• Font Positions: | ||
• Using Symbols: | ||
• Character Classes: | ||
• Special Fonts: | ||
• Artificial Fonts: | ||
• Ligatures and Kerning: |
Next: Font Families, Previous: Fonts and Symbols, Up: Fonts and Symbols [Contents][Index]
The ft
request and the \f
escape change the current font
to font (one-character name f, two-character name
fn).
If font is a style name (as set with the sty
request or
with the styles
command in the DESC file), use it within
the current font family (as set with the fam
request, the
\F
escape, or the family
command in the DESC file).
It is not possible to switch to a font with the name ‘DESC’ (whereas this name could be used as a style name; however, this is not recommended).
With no argument or using ‘P’ as an argument, .ft
switches
to the previous font. Use \f[]
to do this with the escape. The
old syntax forms \fP
or \f[P]
are also supported.
Fonts are generally specified as upper-case strings, which are usually 1 to 4 characters representing an abbreviation or acronym of the font name. This is no limitation, just a convention.
The example below produces two identical lines.
eggs, bacon, .ft B spam .ft and sausage. eggs, bacon, \fBspam\fP and sausage.
Note that \f
doesn’t produce an input token in gtroff
. As
a consequence, it can be used in requests like mc
(which expects
a single character as an argument) to change the font on the fly:
.mc \f[I]x\f[]
The current style name is available in the read-only number register ‘.sty’ (this is a string-valued register); if the current font isn’t a style, the empty string is returned. It is associated with the current environment.
See Font Positions, for an alternative syntax.
Translate font f to font g. Whenever a font
named f is referred to in a \f
escape sequence, in the
F
and S
conditional operators, or in the ft
,
ul
, bd
, cs
, tkf
, special
,
fspecial
, fp
, or sty
requests, font g is
used. If g is missing or equal to f the translation is
undone.
Note that it is not possible to chain font translations. Example:
.ftr XXX TR .ftr XXX YYY .ft XXX ⇒ warning: can't find font `XXX'
Set magnification of font f to factor zoom, which must
be a non-negative integer multiple of 1/1000th. This request is useful
to adjust the optical size of a font in relation to the others. In the
example below, font CR
is magnified by 10% (the zoom factor is
thus 1.1).
.fam P .fzoom CR 1100 .ps 12 Palatino and \f[CR]Courier\f[]
A missing or zero value of zoom is the same as a value of 1000, which means no magnification. f must be a real font name, not a style.
Note that the magnification of a font is completely transparent to troff; a change of the zoom factor doesn’t cause any effect except that the dimensions of glyphs, (word) spaces, kerns, etc., of the affected font are adjusted accordingly.
The zoom factor of the current font is available in the read-only number register ‘.zoom’, in multiples of 1/1000th. It returns zero if there is no magnification.
Next: Font Positions, Previous: Changing Fonts, Up: Fonts and Symbols [Contents][Index]
Due to the variety of fonts available, gtroff
has added the
concept of font families and font styles. The fonts are
specified as the concatenation of the font family and style. Specifying
a font without the family part causes gtroff
to use that style of
the current family.
Currently, fonts for the devices -Tps, -Tpdf,
-Tdvi, -Tlj4, -Tlbp, and the X11 fonts are
set up to this mechanism. By default, gtroff
uses the Times
family with the four styles ‘R’, ‘I’, ‘B’, and ‘BI’.
This way, it is possible to use the basic four fonts and to select a different font family on the command line (see Groff Options).
Switch font family to family (one-character name f,
two-character name fm). If no argument is given, switch back to
the previous font family. Use \F[]
to do this with the escape.
Note that \FP
doesn’t work; it selects font family ‘P’
instead.
The value at start-up is ‘T’. The current font family is available in the read-only number register ‘.fam’ (this is a string-valued register); it is associated with the current environment.
spam, .fam H \" helvetica family spam, \" used font is family H + style R = HR .ft B \" family H + style B = font HB spam, .fam T \" times family spam, \" used font is family T + style B = TB .ft AR \" font AR (not a style) baked beans, .ft R \" family T + style R = font TR and spam.
Note that \F
doesn’t produce an input token in gtroff
. As
a consequence, it can be used in requests like mc
(which expects
a single character as an argument) to change the font family on the fly:
.mc \F[P]x\F[]
The ‘.fn’ register contains the current real font name of the
current font. This is a string-valued register. If the current font is
a style, the value of \n[.fn]
is the proper concatenation of
family and style name.
Associate style with font position n. A font position
can be associated either with a font or with a style. The current font
is the index of a font position and so is also either a font or a style.
If it is a style, the font that is actually used is the font which name
is the concatenation of the name of the current family and the name of
the current style. For example, if the current font is 1 and font
position 1 is associated with style ‘R’ and the current font
family is ‘T’, then font ‘TR’ is used. If the current font is
not a style, then the current family is ignored. If the requests
cs
, bd
, tkf
, uf
, or fspecial
are
applied to a style, they are instead applied to the member of the
current family corresponding to that style.
n must be a non-negative integer value.
The default family can be set with the -f option (see Groff Options). The styles
command in the DESC file controls
which font positions (if any) are initially associated with styles
rather than fonts. For example, the default setting for POSTSCRIPT
fonts
styles R I B BI
is equivalent to
.sty 1 R .sty 2 I .sty 3 B .sty 4 BI
fam
and \F
always check whether the current font position
is valid; this can give surprising results if the current font position
is associated with a style.
In the following example, we want to access the POSTSCRIPT font
FooBar
from the font family Foo
:
.sty \n[.fp] Bar .fam Foo ⇒ warning: can't find font `FooR'
The default font position at start-up is 1; for the POSTSCRIPT
device, this is associated with style ‘R’, so gtroff
tries
to open FooR
.
A solution to this problem is to use a dummy font like the following:
.fp 0 dummy TR \" set up dummy font at position 0 .sty \n[.fp] Bar \" register style `Bar' .ft 0 \" switch to font at position 0 .fam Foo \" activate family `Foo' .ft Bar \" switch to font `FooBar'
See Font Positions.
Next: Using Symbols, Previous: Font Families, Up: Fonts and Symbols [Contents][Index]
For the sake of old phototypesetters and compatibility with old versions
of troff
, gtroff
has the concept of font positions,
on which various fonts are mounted.
Mount font font at position pos (which must be a
non-negative integer). This numeric position can then be referred to
with font changing commands. When gtroff
starts it is using font
position 1 (which must exist; position 0 is unused usually at
start-up).
The current font in use, as a font position, is available in the read-only number register ‘.f’. This can be useful to remember the current font for later recall. It is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
.nr save-font \n[.f] .ft B ... text text text ... .ft \n[save-font]
The number of the next free font position is available in the read-only number register ‘.fp’. This is useful when mounting a new font, like so:
.fp \n[.fp] NEATOFONT
Fonts not listed in the DESC file are automatically mounted on
the next available font position when they are referenced. If a font is
to be mounted explicitly with the fp
request on an unused font
position, it should be mounted on the first unused font position, which
can be found in the .fp
register. Although gtroff
does
not enforce this strictly, it is not allowed to mount a font at a
position whose number is much greater (approx. 1000 positions) than
that of any currently used position.
The fp
request has an optional third argument. This argument
gives the external name of the font, which is used for finding the font
description file. The second argument gives the internal name of the
font, which is used to refer to the font in gtroff
after it has
been mounted. If there is no third argument then the internal name is
used as the external name. This feature makes it possible to use fonts
with long names in compatibility mode.
Both the ft
request and the \f
escape have alternative
syntax forms to access font positions.
Change the current font position to nnn (one-digit position n, two-digit position nn), which must be a non-negative integer.
If nnn is associated with a style (as set with the sty
request or with the styles
command in the DESC file), use
it within the current font family (as set with the fam
request,
the \F
escape, or the family
command in the
DESC file).
this is font 1 .ft 2 this is font 2 .ft \" switch back to font 1 .ft 3 this is font 3 .ft this is font 1 again
See Changing Fonts, for the standard syntax form.
Next: Character Classes, Previous: Font Positions, Up: Fonts and Symbols [Contents][Index]
A glyph is a graphical representation of a character. While a character is an abstract entity containing semantic information, a glyph is something that can be actually seen on screen or paper. It is possible that a character has multiple glyph representation forms (for example, the character ‘A’ can be either written in a roman or an italic font, yielding two different glyphs); sometimes more than one character maps to a single glyph (this is a ligature – the most common is ‘fi’).
A symbol is simply a named glyph. Within gtroff
, all glyph
names of a particular font are defined in its font file. If the user
requests a glyph not available in this font, gtroff
looks up an
ordered list of special fonts. By default, the POSTSCRIPT
output device supports the two special fonts ‘SS’ (slanted symbols)
and ‘S’ (symbols) (the former is looked up before the latter).
Other output devices use different names for special fonts. Fonts
mounted with the fonts
keyword in the DESC file are
globally available. To install additional special fonts locally (i.e.
for a particular font), use the fspecial
request.
Here are the exact rules how gtroff
searches a given symbol:
char
request, use it.
This hides a symbol with the same name in the current font.
fchar
request, use it.
fspecial
call if appropriate.
fschar
request for the
current font, use it.
special
call.
schar
request, use it.
fonts
line in
the DESC file often contains empty positions, which are filled
later on. For example, consider the following:
fonts 3 0 0 FOO
This mounts font foo
at font position 3. We assume that
FOO
is a special font, containing glyph foo
, and that no
font has been loaded yet. The line
.fspecial BAR BAZ
makes font BAZ
special only if font BAR
is active. We
further assume that BAZ
is really a special font, i.e., the font
description file contains the special
keyword, and that it also
contains glyph foo
with a special shape fitting to font
BAR
. After executing fspecial
, font BAR
is loaded
at font position 1, and BAZ
at position 2.
We now switch to a new font XXX
, trying to access glyph
foo
that is assumed to be missing. There are neither
font-specific special fonts for XXX
nor any other fonts made
special with the special
request, so gtroff
starts the
search for special fonts in the list of already mounted fonts, with
increasing font positions. Consequently, it finds BAZ
before
FOO
even for XXX
, which is not the intended behaviour.
See Font Files, and Special Fonts, for more details.
The list of available symbols is device dependent; see the groff_char(7) man page for a complete list of all glyphs. For example, say
man -Tdvi groff_char > groff_char.dvi
for a list using the default DVI fonts (not all versions of the
man
program support the -T option). If you want to use
an additional macro package to change the used fonts, groff
must
be called directly:
groff -Tdvi -mec -man groff_char.7 > groff_char.dvi
Glyph names not listed in groff_char(7) are derived algorithmically, using a simplified version of the Adobe Glyph List (AGL) algorithm, which is described in https://github.com/adobe-type-tools/agl-aglfn. The (frozen) set of glyph names that can’t be derived algorithmically is called groff glyph list (GGL).
uXXXX[X[X]]
. X must be an
uppercase hexadecimal digit. Examples: u1234
, u008E
,
u12DB8
. The largest Unicode value is 0x10FFFF. There must be at
least four X
digits; if necessary, add leading zeroes (after the
‘u’). No zero padding is allowed for character codes greater than
0xFFFF. Surrogates (i.e., Unicode values greater than 0xFFFF
represented with character codes from the surrogate area U+D800-U+DFFF)
are not allowed too.
‘u’ component1 ‘_’ component2 ‘_’ component3 …
Example: u0045_0302_0301
.
For simplicity, all Unicode characters that are composites must be
decomposed maximally (this is normalization form D in the Unicode
standard); for example, u00CA_0301
is not a valid glyph name
since U+00CA (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX) can be
further decomposed into U+0045 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E) and U+0302
(COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT). u0045_0302_0301
is thus the
glyph name for U+1EBE, LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX AND
ACUTE.
u0100
(LATIN
LETTER A WITH MACRON) is automatically decomposed into
u0041_0304
. Additionally, a glyph name of the GGL is preferred
to an algorithmically derived glyph name; groff also automatically does
the mapping. Example: The glyph u0045_0302
is mapped to
^E
.
^E_u0301
is invalid.
Insert a symbol name (two-character name nm) or a composite glyph with component glyphs component1, component2, ... There is no special syntax for one-character names – the natural form ‘\n’ would collide with escapes.17
If name is undefined, a warning of type ‘char’ is generated, and the escape is ignored. See Debugging, for information about warnings.
groff resolves \[...]
with more than a single component as
follows:
uXXXX
form.
uXXXX
that is found in the list of
decomposable glyphs is decomposed.
No check for the existence of any component (similar to tr
request) is done.
Examples:
\[A ho]
‘A’ maps to u0041
, ‘ho’ maps to u02DB
, thus the
final glyph name would be u0041_02DB
. Note this is not the
expected result: The ogonek glyph ‘ho’ is a spacing ogonek, but for
a proper composite a non-spacing ogonek (U+0328) is necessary. Looking
into the file composite.tmac one can find ‘.composite ho u0328’, which changes the mapping of ‘ho’ while a composite glyph
name is constructed, causing the final glyph name to be
u0041_0328
.
\[^E u0301]
\[^E aa]
\[E a^ aa]
\[E ^ ']
‘^E’ maps to u0045_0302
, thus the final glyph name is
u0045_0302_0301
in all forms (assuming proper calls of the
composite
request).
It is not possible to define glyphs with names like ‘A ho’
within a groff font file. This is not really a limitation; instead, you
have to define u0041_0328
.
Typeset the glyph named xxx.18 Normally it is more
convenient to use \[xxx]
, but \C
has the advantage
that it is compatible with newer versions of AT&T troff
and is available in compatibility mode.
Map glyph name from to glyph name to if it is used in
\[...]
with more than one component. See above for examples.
This mapping is based on glyph names only; no check for the existence of either glyph is done.
A set of default mappings for many accents can be found in the file composite.tmac, which is loaded at start-up.
Typeset the glyph with code n in the current font
(n
is not the input character code). The number
n can be any non-negative decimal integer. Most devices only
have glyphs with codes between 0 and 255; the Unicode output device
uses codes in the range 0–65535. If the current font does not contain
a glyph with that code, special fonts are not searched. The
\N
escape sequence can be conveniently used in conjunction with
the char
request:
.char \[phone] \f[ZD]\N'37'
The code of each glyph is given in the fourth column in the font
description file after the charset
command. It is possible to
include unnamed glyphs in the font description file by using a name of
‘---’; the \N
escape sequence is the only way to use these.
No kerning is applied to glyphs accessed with \N
.
Some escape sequences directly map onto special glyphs.
This is a backslash followed by the apostrophe character,
ASCII character 0x27
(EBCDIC character
0x7D
). The same as \[aa]
, the acute accent.
This is a backslash followed by ASCII character 0x60
(EBCDIC character 0x79
usually). The same as
\[ga]
, the grave accent.
This is the same as \[-]
, the minus sign in the current font.
This is the same as \[ul]
, the underline character.
Input characters and symbols have certain properties associated with
it.19 These properties can be
modified with the cflags
request. The first argument is the sum
of the desired flags and the remaining arguments are the characters or
symbols to have those properties. It is possible to omit the spaces
between the characters or symbols. Instead of single characters or
symbols you can also use character classes (see Character Classes
for more details).
1
The character ends sentences (initially characters ‘.?!’ have this property).
2
Lines can be broken before the character (initially no characters have
this property). This only works if both the characters before and after
have non-zero hyphenation codes (as set with the hcode
request).
Use value 64 to override this behaviour.
4
Lines can be broken after the character (initially the character
‘-’ and the symbols ‘\[hy]’ and ‘\[em]’ have this
property). This only works if both the characters before and after have
non-zero hyphenation codes (as set with the hcode
request). Use
value 64 to override this behaviour.
8
The character overlaps horizontally if used as a horizontal line building element. Initially the symbols ‘\[ul]’, ‘\[rn]’, ‘\[ru]’, ‘\[radicalex]’, and ‘\[sqrtex]’ have this property.
16
The character overlaps vertically if used as vertical line building element. Initially symbol ‘\[br]’ has this property.
32
An end-of-sentence character followed by any number of characters with this property is treated as the end of a sentence if followed by a newline or two spaces; in other words the character is transparent for the purposes of end-of-sentence recognition – this is the same as having a zero space factor in TeX (initially characters ‘"')]*’ and the symbols ‘\[dg]’, ‘\[rq]’, and ‘\[cq]’ have this property).
64
Ignore hyphenation code values of the surrounding characters. Use this in combination with values 2 and 4 (initially no characters have this property). For example, if you need an automatic break point after the en-dash in number ranges like ‘3000–5000’, insert
.cflags 68 \(en
into your document. Note, however, that this can lead to bad layout if
done without thinking; in most situations, a better solution instead of
changing the cflags
value is to insert \:
right after the
hyphen at the places that really need a break point.
128
Prohibit a line break before the character, but allow a line break after the character. This works only in combination with flags 256 and 512 (see below) and has no effect otherwise.
256
Prohibit a line break after the character, but allow a line break before the character. This works only in combination with flags 128 and 512 (see below) and has no effect otherwise.
512
Allow line break before or after the character. This works only in combination with flags 128 and 256 and has no effect otherwise.
Contrary to flag values 2 and 4, the flags 128, 256, and 512 work pairwise. If, for example, the left character has value 512, and the right character 128, no line break gets inserted. If we use value 6 instead for the left character, a line break after the character can’t be suppressed since the right neighbour character doesn’t get examined.
Define a new glyph g to be string (which can be empty).20 Every time glyph g needs to be printed, string is processed in a temporary environment and the result is wrapped up into a single object. Compatibility mode is turned off and the escape character is set to ‘\’ while string is being processed. Any emboldening, constant spacing or track kerning is applied to this object rather than to individual characters in string.
A glyph defined by these requests can be used just like a normal glyph
provided by the output device. In particular, other characters can be
translated to it with the tr
or trin
requests; it can be
made the leader character by the lc
request; repeated patterns
can be drawn with the glyph using the \l
and \L
escape
sequences; words containing the glyph can be hyphenated correctly if the
hcode
request is used to give the glyph’s symbol a hyphenation
code.
There is a special anti-recursion feature: Use of g
within the
glyph’s definition is handled like normal characters and symbols not
defined with char
.
Note that the tr
and trin
requests take precedence if
char
accesses the same symbol.
.tr XY X ⇒ Y .char X Z X ⇒ Y .tr XX X ⇒ Z
The fchar
request defines a fallback glyph: gtroff
only
checks for glyphs defined with fchar
if it cannot find the glyph
in the current font. gtroff
carries out this test before
checking special fonts.
fschar
defines a fallback glyph for font f:
gtroff
checks for glyphs defined with fschar
after the
list of fonts declared as font-specific special fonts with the
fspecial
request, but before the list of fonts declared as global
special fonts with the special
request.
Finally, the schar
request defines a global fallback glyph:
gtroff
checks for glyphs defined with schar
after the list
of fonts declared as global special fonts with the special
request, but before the already mounted special fonts.
See Using Symbols, for a detailed description of the glyph searching
mechanism in gtroff
.
Remove the definitions of glyphs c1, c2, ...
This undoes the effect of a char
, fchar
, or schar
request.
It is possible to omit the whitespace between arguments.
The request rfschar
removes glyph definitions defined with
fschar
for glyph f.
See Special Characters.
Next: Special Fonts, Previous: Using Symbols, Up: Fonts and Symbols [Contents][Index]
Classes are particularly useful for East Asian languages such as Chinese, Japanese, and Korean, where the number of needed characters is much larger than in European languages, and where large sets of characters share the same properties.
In groff
, a character class (or simply “class”) is a set
of characters, grouped by some user aspect. The class
request
defines such classes so that other requests can refer to all characters
belonging to this set with a single class name. Currently, only the
cflags
request can handle character classes.
A class
request takes a class name followed by a list of
entities. In its simplest form, the entities are characters or symbols:
.class [prepunct] , : ; > }
Since class and glyph names share the same namespace, it is recommended
to start and end the class name with [
and ]
,
respectively, to avoid collisions with normal groff
symbols (and
symbols defined by the user). In particular, the presence of ]
in the symbol name intentionally prevents the usage of \[...]
,
thus you must use the \C
escape to access a class with such a
name.
You can also use a special character range notation, consisting of a
start character or symbol, followed by ‘-’, and an end character or
symbol. Internally, gtroff
converts these two symbol names to
Unicode values (according to the groff glyph gist), which then give the
start and end value of the range. If that fails, the class definition
is skipped.
Finally, classes can be nested, too.
Here is a more complex example:
.class [prepunctx] \C'[prepunct]' \[u2013]-\[u2016]
The class ‘prepunctx’ now contains the contents of the class
prepunct
as defined above (the set ‘, : ; > }’), and
characters in the range between U+2013
and U+2016
.
If you want to add ‘-’ to a class, it must be the first character value in the argument list, otherwise it gets misinterpreted as a range.
Note that it is not possible to use class names within range definitions.
Typical use of the class
request is to control line-breaking and
hyphenation rules as defined by the cflags
request. For example,
to inhibit line breaks before the characters belonging to the
prepunctx
class, you can write:
.cflags 2 \C'[prepunctx]'
See the cflags
request in Using Symbols, for more details.
Next: Artificial Fonts, Previous: Character Classes, Up: Fonts and Symbols [Contents][Index]
Special fonts are those that gtroff
searches when it cannot find
the requested glyph in the current font. The Symbol font is usually a
special font.
gtroff
provides the following two requests to add more special
fonts. See Using Symbols, for a detailed description of the glyph
searching mechanism in gtroff
.
Usually, only non-TTY devices have special fonts.
Use the special
request to define special fonts. Initially, this
list is empty.
Use the fspecial
request to designate special fonts only when
font f is active. Initially, this list is empty.
Previous calls to special
or fspecial
are overwritten;
without arguments, the particular list of special fonts is set to empty.
Special fonts are searched in the order they appear as arguments.
All fonts that appear in a call to special
or fspecial
are loaded.
See Using Symbols, for the exact search order of glyphs.
Next: Ligatures and Kerning, Previous: Special Fonts, Up: Fonts and Symbols [Contents][Index]
There are a number of requests and escapes for artificially creating
fonts. These are largely vestiges of the days when output devices did
not have a wide variety of fonts, and when nroff
and troff
were separate programs. Most of them are no longer necessary in GNU
troff
. Nevertheless, they are supported.
Change (increment, decrement) the height of the current font, but not the width. If height is zero, restore the original height. Default scaling indicator is ‘z’.
The read-only number register .height
contains the font height as
set by \H
.
Currently, only the -Tps and -Tpdf devices support this feature.
Note that \H
doesn’t produce an input token in gtroff
. As
a consequence, it can be used in requests like mc
(which expects
a single character as an argument) to change the font on the fly:
.mc \H'+5z'x\H'0'
In compatibility mode, gtroff
behaves differently: If an
increment or decrement is used, it is always taken relative to the
current point size and not relative to the previously selected font
height. Thus,
.cp 1 \H'+5'test \H'+5'test
prints the word ‘test’ twice with the same font height (five points larger than the current font size).
Slant the current font by slant degrees. Positive values slant to the right. Only integer values are possible.
The read-only number register .slant
contains the font slant as
set by \S
.
Currently, only the -Tps and -Tpdf devices support this feature.
Note that \S
doesn’t produce an input token in gtroff
. As
a consequence, it can be used in requests like mc
(which expects
a single character as an argument) to change the font on the fly:
.mc \S'20'x\S'0'
This request is incorrectly documented in the original Unix troff manual; the slant is always set to an absolute value.
The ul
request normally underlines subsequent lines if a TTY
output device is used. Otherwise, the lines are printed in italics
(only the term ‘underlined’ is used in the following). The single
argument is the number of input lines to be underlined; with no
argument, the next line is underlined. If lines is zero or
negative, stop the effects of ul
(if it was active). Requests
and empty lines do not count for computing the number of underlined
input lines, even if they produce some output like tl
. Lines
inserted by macros (e.g. invoked by a trap) do count.
At the beginning of ul
, the current font is stored and the
underline font is activated. Within the span of a ul
request, it
is possible to change fonts, but after the last line affected by
ul
the saved font is restored.
This number of lines still to be underlined is associated with the
current environment (see Environments). The underline font can be
changed with the uf
request.
The ul
request does not underline spaces.
The cu
request is similar to ul
but underlines spaces as
well (if a TTY output device is used).
Set the underline font (globally) used by ul
and cu
. By
default, this is the font at position 2. font can be either
a non-negative font position or the name of a font.
Artificially create a bold font by printing each glyph twice, slightly offset.
Two syntax forms are available.
font can be either a non-negative font position or the name of a font.
offset is available in the .b
read-only register if a
special font is active; in the bd
request, its default unit is
‘u’.
This affects special fonts only (either set up with the special
command in font files or with the fspecial
request).
Switch to and from constant glyph space mode. If activated, the
width of every glyph is width/36 ems. The em size is given
absolutely by em-size; if this argument is missing, the em value
is taken from the current font size (as set with the ps
request)
when the font is effectively in use. Without second and third argument,
constant glyph space mode is deactivated.
Default scaling indicator for em-size is ‘z’; width is an integer.
Previous: Artificial Fonts, Up: Fonts and Symbols [Contents][Index]
Ligatures are groups of characters that are run together, i.e, producing a single glyph. For example, the letters ‘f’ and ‘i’ can form a ligature ‘fi’ as in the word ‘file’. This produces a cleaner look (albeit subtle) to the printed output. Usually, ligatures are not available in fonts for TTY output devices.
Most POSTSCRIPT fonts support the fi and fl ligatures. The C/A/T
typesetter that was the target of AT&T troff
also
supported ‘ff’, ‘ffi’, and ‘ffl’ ligatures. Advanced typesetters or
‘expert’ fonts may include ligatures for ‘ft’ and ‘ct’, although GNU
troff
does not support these (yet).
Only the current font is checked for ligatures and kerns; neither
special fonts nor entities defined with the char
request (and its
siblings) are taken into account.
Switch the ligature mechanism on or off; if the parameter is non-zero or
missing, ligatures are enabled, otherwise disabled. Default is on. The
current ligature mode can be found in the read-only number register
.lg
(set to 1 or 2 if ligatures are enabled,
0 otherwise).
Setting the ligature mode to 2 enables the two-character ligatures (fi, fl, and ff) and disables the three-character ligatures (ffi and ffl).
Pairwise kerning is another subtle typesetting mechanism that modifies the distance between a glyph pair to improve readability. In most cases (but not always) the distance is decreased. Typewriter-like fonts and fonts for terminals where all glyphs have the same width don’t use kerning.
Switch kerning on or off. If the parameter is non-zero or missing,
enable pairwise kerning, otherwise disable it. The read-only number
register .kern
is set to 1 if pairwise kerning is enabled,
0 otherwise.
If the font description file contains pairwise kerning information,
glyphs from that font are kerned. Kerning between two glyphs can be
inhibited by placing \&
between them: ‘V\&A’.
See Font File Format.
Track kerning expands or reduces the space between glyphs. This can be handy, for example, if you need to squeeze a long word onto a single line or spread some text to fill a narrow column. It must be used with great care since it is usually considered bad typography if the reader notices the effect.
Enable track kerning for font f. If the current font is f the width of every glyph is increased by an amount between n1 and n2 (n1, n2 can be negative); if the current point size is less than or equal to s1 the width is increased by n1; if it is greater than or equal to s2 the width is increased by n2; if the point size is greater than or equal to s1 and less than or equal to s2 the increase in width is a linear function of the point size.
The default scaling indicator is ‘z’ for s1 and s2, ‘p’ for n1 and n2.
Note that the track kerning amount is added even to the rightmost glyph in a line; for large values it is thus recommended to increase the line length by the same amount to compensate it.
Sometimes, when typesetting letters of different fonts, more or less space at such boundaries is needed. There are two escapes to help with this.
Increase the width of the preceding glyph so that the spacing between
that glyph and the following glyph is correct if the following glyph is
a roman glyph. For example, if an italic f
is immediately
followed by a roman right parenthesis, then in many fonts the top right
portion of the f
overlaps the top left of the right
parenthesis. Use this escape sequence whenever an italic glyph is
immediately followed by a roman glyph without any intervening space.
This small amount of space is also called italic correction.
Modify the spacing of the following glyph so that the spacing between that glyph and the preceding glyph is correct if the preceding glyph is a roman glyph. Use this escape sequence whenever a roman glyph is immediately followed by an italic glyph without any intervening space. In analogy to above, this space could be called left italic correction, but this term isn’t used widely.
Insert a zero-width character, which is invisible. Its intended use is to stop interaction of a character with its surroundings.
Test. Test. ⇒ Test. Test. Test.\& Test. ⇒ Test. Test.
.Test ⇒ warning: `Test' not defined \&.Test ⇒ .Test
tr
request (see Character Translations).
This escape is similar to \&
except that it behaves like a
character declared with the cflags
request to be transparent for
the purposes of an end-of-sentence character.
Its main usage is in macro definitions to protect against arguments starting with a control character.
.de xxx \)\\$1 .. .de yyy \&\\$1 .. This is a test.\c .xxx ' This is a test. ⇒This is a test.' This is a test. This is a test.\c .yyy ' This is a test. ⇒This is a test.' This is a test.
Next: Strings, Previous: Fonts and Symbols, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
gtroff
uses two dimensions with each line of text, type size and
vertical spacing. The type size is approximately the height of
the tallest glyph.21 Vertical spacing is the amount
of space gtroff
allows for a line of text; normally, this is
about 20% larger than the current type size. Ratios smaller than
this can result in hard-to-read text; larger than this, it spreads the
text out more vertically (useful for term papers). By default,
gtroff
uses 10 point type on 12 point spacing.
The difference between type size and vertical spacing is known, by typesetters, as leading (this is pronounced ‘ledding’).
• Changing Type Sizes: | ||
• Fractional Type Sizes: |
Next: Fractional Type Sizes, Previous: Sizes, Up: Sizes [Contents][Index]
Use the ps
request or the \s
escape to change (increase,
decrease) the type size (in points). Specify size as either an
absolute point size, or as a relative change from the current size. The
size 0 (for both .ps
and \s
), or no argument (for
.ps
only), goes back to the previous size.
Default scaling indicator of size
is ‘z’. If size
is
negative, it is set to 1u.
The read-only number register .s
returns the point size in points
as a decimal fraction. This is a string. To get the point size in
scaled points, use the .ps
register instead.
.s
is associated with the current environment
(see Environments).
snap, snap, .ps +2 grin, grin, .ps +2 wink, wink, \s+2nudge, nudge,\s+8 say no more! .ps 10
The \s
escape may be called in a variety of ways. Much like
other escapes there must be a way to determine where the argument ends
and the text begins. Any of the following forms are valid:
\sn
Set the point size to n points. n must be either 0 or in the range 4 to 39.
\s+n
\s-n
Increase or decrease the point size by n points. n must be exactly one digit.
\s(nn
Set the point size to nn points. nn must be exactly two digits.
\s+(nn
\s-(nn
\s(+nn
\s(-nn
Increase or decrease the point size by nn points. nn must be exactly two digits.
Note that \s
doesn’t produce an input token in gtroff
. As
a consequence, it can be used in requests like mc
(which expects
a single character as an argument) to change the font on the fly:
.mc \s[20]x\s[0]
See Fractional Type Sizes, for yet another syntactical form of using
the \s
escape.
Some devices may only have certain permissible sizes, in which case
gtroff
rounds to the nearest permissible size. The DESC
file specifies which sizes are permissible for the device.
Use the sizes
request to change the permissible sizes for the
current output device. Arguments are in scaled points; the
sizescale
line in the DESC file for the output device
provides the scaling factor. For example, if the scaling factor is
1000, then the value 12000 is 12 points.
Each argument can be a single point size (such as ‘12000’), or a range of sizes (such as ‘4000-72000’). You can optionally end the list with a zero.
Change (increase, decrease) the vertical spacing by space. The default scaling indicator is ‘p’.
If vs
is called without an argument, the vertical spacing is
reset to the previous value before the last call to vs
.
gtroff
creates a warning of type ‘range’ if space is
negative; the vertical spacing is then set to smallest positive value,
the vertical resolution (as given in the .V
register).
Note that ‘.vs 0’ isn’t saved in a diversion since it doesn’t result in a vertical motion. You explicitly have to repeat this command before inserting the diversion.
The read-only number register .v
contains the current vertical
spacing; it is associated with the current environment
(see Environments).
The effective vertical line spacing consists of four components. Breaking a line causes the following actions (in the given order).
\x
escapes with a
negative argument in the current output line.
vs
request.
\x
escapes with a
positive argument in the line that has just been output.
pvs
request.
It is usually better to use vs
or pvs
instead of ls
to produce double-spaced documents: vs
and pvs
have a
finer granularity for the inserted vertical space compared to ls
;
furthermore, certain preprocessors assume single-spacing.
See Manipulating Spacing, for more details on the \x
escape
and the ls
request.
Change (increase, decrease) the post-vertical spacing by space. The default scaling indicator is ‘p’.
If pvs
is called without an argument, the post-vertical spacing
is reset to the previous value before the last call to pvs
.
gtroff
creates a warning of type ‘range’ if space is
zero or negative; the vertical spacing is then set to zero.
The read-only number register .pvs
contains the current
post-vertical spacing; it is associated with the current environment
(see Environments).
Previous: Changing Type Sizes, Up: Sizes [Contents][Index]
A scaled point is equal to 1/sizescale points, where
sizescale is specified in the DESC file (1 by
default). There is a new scale indicator ‘z’, which has the effect
of multiplying by sizescale. Requests and escape sequences in
gtroff
interpret arguments that represent a point size as being
in units of scaled points, but they evaluate each such argument using a
default scale indicator of ‘z’. Arguments treated in this way are
the argument to the ps
request, the third argument to the
cs
request, the second and fourth arguments to the tkf
request, the argument to the \H
escape sequence, and those
variants of the \s
escape sequence that take a numeric expression
as their argument (see below).
For example, suppose sizescale is 1000; then a scaled point is equivalent to a millipoint; the request ‘.ps 10.25’ is equivalent to ‘.ps 10.25z’ and thus sets the point size to 10250 scaled points, which is equal to 10.25 points.
gtroff
disallows the use of the ‘z’ scale indicator in
instances where it would make no sense, such as a numeric expression
whose default scale indicator was neither ‘u’ nor ‘z’.
Similarly it would make no sense to use a scaling indicator other than
‘z’ or ‘u’ in a numeric expression whose default scale
indicator was ‘z’, and so gtroff
disallows this as well.
There is also new scale indicator ‘s’, which multiplies by the number of units in a scaled point. So, for example, ‘\n[.ps]s’ is equal to ‘1m’. Be sure not to confuse the ‘s’ and ‘z’ scale indicators.
A read-only number register returning the point size in scaled points.
.ps
is associated with the current environment
(see Environments).
The last-requested point size in scaled points is contained in the
.psr
read-only number register. The last requested point size in
points as a decimal fraction can be found in .sr
. This is a
string-valued read-only number register.
Note that the requested point sizes are device-independent, whereas the
values returned by the .ps
and .s
registers are not. For
example, if a point size of 11pt is requested, and a sizes
request (or a sizescale
line in a DESC file) specifies
10.95pt instead, this value is actually used.
Both registers are associated with the current environment (see Environments).
The \s
escape has the following syntax for working with
fractional type sizes:
\s[n]
\s'n'
Set the point size to n scaled points; n is a numeric expression with a default scale indicator of ‘z’.
\s[+n]
\s[-n]
\s+[n]
\s-[n]
\s'+n'
\s'-n'
\s+'n'
\s-'n'
Increase or decrease the point size by n scaled points; n is a numeric expression (which may start with a minus sign) with a default scale indicator of ‘z’.
See Font Files.
Next: Conditionals and Loops, Previous: Sizes, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
gtroff
has string variables, which are entirely for user
convenience (i.e. there are no built-in strings except .T
, but
even this is a read-write string variable).
Although the following requests can be used to create strings, simply using an undefined string will cause it to be defined as empty. See Identifiers.
Define and access a string variable name (one-character
name n, two-character name nm). If name already
exists, ds
overwrites the previous definition. Only the syntax
form using brackets can take arguments that are handled identically to
macro arguments; the single exception is that a closing bracket as an
argument must be enclosed in double quotes. See Request and Macro Arguments, and Parameters.
Example:
.ds foo a \\$1 test . This is \*[foo nice]. ⇒ This is a nice test.
The \*
escape interpolates (expands in-place) a
previously defined string variable. To be more precise, the stored
string is pushed onto the input stack, which is then parsed by
gtroff
. Similar to number registers, it is possible to nest
strings, i.e., string variables can be called within string variables.
If the string named by the \*
escape does not exist, it is
defined as empty, and a warning of type ‘mac’ is emitted (see
Debugging, for more details).
Caution: Unlike other requests, the second argument to the
ds
request takes up the entire line including trailing spaces.
This means that comments on a line with such a request can introduce
unwanted space into a string.
.ds TeX T\h'-.2m'\v'.2m'E\v'-.2m'\h'-.1m'X \" Knuth's TeX
Instead the comment should be put on another line or have the comment escape adjacent with the end of the string.
.ds TeX T\h'-.2m'\v'.2m'E\v'-.2m'\h'-.1m'X\" Knuth's TeX
To produce leading space the string can be started with a double quote. No trailing quote is needed; in fact, any trailing quote is included in your string.
.ds sign " Yours in a white wine sauce,
Strings are not limited to a single line of text. A string can span several lines by escaping the newlines with a backslash. The resulting string is stored without the newlines.
.ds foo lots and lots \ of text are on these \ next several lines
It is not possible to have real newlines in a string. To put a single double quote character into a string, use two consecutive double quote characters.
The ds1
request turns off compatibility mode while interpreting a
string. To be more precise, a compatibility save input token is
inserted at the beginning of the string, and a compatibility
restore input token at the end.
.nr xxx 12345 .ds aa The value of xxx is \\n[xxx]. .ds1 bb The value of xxx is \\n[xxx]. . .cp 1 . \*(aa ⇒ warning: number register `[' not defined ⇒ The value of xxx is 0xxx]. \*(bb ⇒ The value of xxx is 12345.
Strings, macros, and diversions (and boxes) share the same name space. Internally, even the same mechanism is used to store them. This has some interesting consequences. For example, it is possible to call a macro with string syntax and vice versa.
.de xxx a funny test. .. This is \*[xxx] ⇒ This is a funny test. .ds yyy a funny test This is .yyy ⇒ This is a funny test.
In particular, interpolating a string does not hide existing macro arguments. Thus in a macro, a more efficient way of doing
.xx \\$@
is
\\*[xx]\\
Note that the latter calling syntax doesn’t change the value of
\$0
, which is then inherited from the calling macro.
Diversions and boxes can be also called with string syntax.
Another consequence is that you can copy one-line diversions or boxes to a string.
.di xxx
a \fItest\fR
.br
.di
.ds yyy This is \*[xxx]\c
\*[yyy].
⇒ This is a test.
As the previous example shows, it is possible to store formatted output
in strings. The \c
escape prevents the insertion of an
additional blank line in the output.
Copying diversions longer than a single output line produces unexpected results.
.di xxx a funny .br test .br .di .ds yyy This is \*[xxx]\c \*[yyy]. ⇒ test This is a funny.
Usually, it is not predictable whether a diversion contains one or more
output lines, so this mechanism should be avoided. With Unix
troff
, this was the only solution to strip off a final newline
from a diversion. Another disadvantage is that the spaces in the copied
string are already formatted, making them unstretchable. This can cause
ugly results.
A clean solution to this problem is available in GNU troff
, using
the requests chop
to remove the final newline of a diversion, and
unformat
to make the horizontal spaces stretchable again.
.box xxx a funny .br test .br .box .chop xxx .unformat xxx This is \*[xxx]. ⇒ This is a funny test.
See Gtroff Internals, for more information.
The as
request is similar to ds
but appends string
to the string stored as name instead of redefining it. If
name doesn’t exist yet, it is created.
.as sign " with shallots, onions and garlic,
The as1
request is similar to as
, but compatibility mode
is switched off while the appended string is interpreted. To be more
precise, a compatibility save input token is inserted at the
beginning of the appended string, and a compatibility restore
input token at the end.
Rudimentary string manipulation routines are given with the next two requests.
Replace the string named str with the substring defined by the indices n1 and n2. The first character in the string has index 0. If n2 is omitted, it is implicitly set to the largest valid value (the string length minus one). If the index value n1 or n2 is negative, it is counted from the end of the string, going backwards: The last character has index -1, the character before the last character has index -2, etc.
.ds xxx abcdefgh .substring xxx 1 -4 \*[xxx] ⇒ bcde .substring xxx 2 \*[xxx] ⇒ de
Compute the number of characters of str and return it in the
number register reg. If reg doesn’t exist, it is created.
str
is read in copy mode.
.ds xxx abcd\h'3i'efgh .length yyy \*[xxx] \n[yyy] ⇒ 14
Rename the request, macro, diversion, or string xx to yy.
Remove the request, macro, diversion, or string xx. gtroff
treats subsequent invocations as if the object had never been defined.
Create an alias named new for the request, string, macro, or
diversion object named old. The new name and the old name are
exactly equivalent (it is similar to a hard rather than a soft link). If
old is undefined, gtroff
generates a warning of type
‘mac’ and ignores the request.
To understand how the als
request works it is probably best to
think of two different pools: one pool for objects (macros, strings,
etc.), and another one for names. As soon as an object is defined,
gtroff
adds it to the object pool, adds its name to the name
pool, and creates a link between them. When als
creates an
alias, it adds a new name to the name pool that gets linked to the same
object as the old name.
Now consider this example.
.de foo .. . .als bar foo . .de bar . foo .. . .bar ⇒ input stack limit exceeded
The definition of macro bar
replaces the old object this name is
linked to. However, the alias to foo
is still active! In
other words, foo
is still linked to the same object as
bar
, and the result of calling bar
is an infinite,
recursive loop that finally leads to an error.
To undo an alias, simply call rm
on the aliased name. The object
itself is not destroyed until there are no more aliases.
Remove (chop) the last character from the macro, string, or diversion
named xx. This is useful for removing the newline from the end of
diversions that are to be interpolated as strings. This command can be
used repeatedly; see Gtroff Internals, for details on nodes
inserted additionally by gtroff
.
See Identifiers, and Comments.
Next: Writing Macros, Previous: Strings, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
• Operators in Conditionals: | ||
• if-else: | ||
• while: |
Next: if-else, Previous: Conditionals and Loops, Up: Conditionals and Loops [Contents][Index]
In if
, ie
, and while
requests, in addition to ordinary
Expressions, there are several more operators available:
e
o
True if the current page is even or odd numbered (respectively).
n
True if the document is being processed in nroff mode (i.e., the
.nroff
command has been issued). See Troff and Nroff Mode.
t
True if the document is being processed in troff mode (i.e., the
.troff
command has been issued). See Troff and Nroff Mode.
v
Always false. This condition is for compatibility with other
troff
versions only (identifying a -Tversatec
device).
'xxx'yyy'
True if the output produced by xxx is equal to the output produced
by yyy. Other characters can be used in place of the single
quotes; the same set of delimiters as for the \D
escape is used
(see Escapes). gtroff
formats xxx and yyy in
separate environments; after the comparison the resulting data is
discarded.
.ie "|"\fR|\fP" \ true .el \ false ⇒ true
The resulting motions, glyph sizes, and fonts have to match,22 and not the individual motion, size, and font requests. In the previous example, ‘|’ and ‘\fR|\fP’ both result in a roman ‘|’ glyph with the same point size and at the same location on the page, so the strings are equal. If ‘.ft I’ had been added before the ‘.ie’, the result would be “false” because (the first) ‘|’ produces an italic ‘|’ rather than a roman one.
To compare strings without processing, surround the data with \?
.
.ie "\?|\?"\?\fR|\fP\?" \ true .el \ false ⇒ false
Since data protected with \?
is read in copy-in mode it is even
possible to use incomplete input without causing an error.
.ds a \[ .ds b \[ .ie '\?\*a\?'\?\*b\?' \ true .el \ false ⇒ true
r xxx
True if there is a number register named xxx.
d xxx
True if there is a string, macro, diversion, or request named xxx.
m xxx
True if there is a color named xxx.
c g
True if there is a glyph g available23; g is either an ASCII character or a special
character (\N'xxx'
, \(gg
or
\[ggg]
); the condition is also true if g has been
defined by the char
request.
F font
True if a font named font exists. font is handled as if it
was opened with the ft
request (that is, font translation and
styles are applied), without actually mounting it.
This test doesn’t load the complete font but only its header to verify its validity.
S style
True if style style has been registered. Font translation is applied.
Note that these operators can’t be combined with other operators like ‘:’ or ‘&’; only a leading ‘!’ (without whitespace between the exclamation mark and the operator) can be used to negate the result.
.nr xxx 1 .ie !r xxx \ true .el \ false ⇒ false
A whitespace after ‘!’ always evaluates to zero (this bizarre
behaviour is due to compatibility with Unix troff
).
.nr xxx 1 .ie ! r xxx \ true .el \ false ⇒ r xxx true
It is possible to omit the whitespace before the argument to the ‘r’, ‘d’, and ‘c’ operators.
See Expressions.
Next: while, Previous: Operators in Conditionals, Up: Conditionals and Loops [Contents][Index]
gtroff
has if-then-else constructs like other languages, although
the formatting can be painful.
Evaluate the expression expr, and executes anything (the remainder of the line) if expr evaluates to a value greater than zero (true). anything is interpreted as though it was on a line by itself (except that leading spaces are swallowed). See Operators in Conditionals, for more info.
.nr xxx 1 .nr yyy 2 .if ((\n[xxx] == 1) & (\n[yyy] == 2)) true ⇒ true
Executes anything. This is similar to .if 1
.
Use the ie
and el
requests to write an if-then-else. The
first request is the ‘if’ part and the latter is the ‘else’ part.
.ie n .ls 2 \" double-spacing in nroff .el .ls 1 \" single-spacing in troff
In many cases, an if (or if-else) construct needs to execute more than
one request. This can be done using the escapes \{
(which must
start the first line) and \}
(which must end the last line).
.ie t \{\ . ds lq `` . ds rq '' .\} .el \{\ . ds lq "" . ds rq "" .\}
See Expressions.
Previous: if-else, Up: Conditionals and Loops [Contents][Index]
gtroff
provides a looping construct using the while
request, which is used much like the if
(and related) requests.
Evaluate the expression expr, and repeatedly execute anything (the remainder of the line) until expr evaluates to 0.
.nr a 0 1 .while (\na < 9) \{\ \n+a, .\} \n+a ⇒ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Some remarks.
while
request is treated like the body of a
de
request: gtroff
temporarily stores it in a macro that
is deleted after the loop has been exited. It can considerably slow
down a macro if the body of the while
request (within the macro)
is large. Each time the macro is executed, the while
body is
parsed and stored again as a temporary macro.
.de xxx . nr num 10 . while (\\n[num] > 0) \{\ . \" many lines of code . nr num -1 . \} ..
The traditional and often better solution (Unix troff
doesn’t
have the while
request) is to use a recursive macro instead that
is parsed only once during its definition.
.de yyy . if (\\n[num] > 0) \{\ . \" many lines of code . nr num -1 . yyy . \} .. . .de xxx . nr num 10 . yyy ..
Note that the number of available recursion levels is set to 1000
(this is a compile-time constant value of gtroff
).
while
body must end a line.
.if 1 \{\ . nr a 0 1 . while (\n[a] < 10) \{\ . nop \n+[a] .\}\} ⇒ unbalanced \{ \}
Break out of a while
loop. Be sure not to confuse this with the
br
request (causing a line break).
Finish the current iteration of a while
loop, immediately
restarting the next iteration.
See Expressions.
Next: Page Motions, Previous: Conditionals and Loops, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
A macro is a collection of text and embedded commands that can be invoked multiple times. Use macros to define common operations. See Strings, for a (limited) alternative syntax to call macros.
Although the following requests can be used to create macros, simply using an undefined macro will cause it to be defined as empty. See Identifiers.
Define a new macro named name. gtroff
copies subsequent
lines (starting with the next one) into an internal buffer until it
encounters the line ‘..’ (two dots). If the optional second
argument to de
is present it is used as the macro closure
request instead of ‘..’.
There can be whitespace after the first dot in the line containing the ending token (either ‘.’ or macro ‘end’). Don’t insert a tab character immediately after the ‘..’, otherwise it isn’t recognized as the end-of-macro symbol.24
Here a small example macro called ‘P’ that causes a break and inserts some vertical space. It could be used to separate paragraphs.
.de P . br . sp .8v ..
The following example defines a macro within another. Remember that expansion must be protected twice; once for reading the macro and once for executing.
\# a dummy macro to avoid a warning .de end .. . .de foo . de bar end . nop \f[B]Hello \\\\$1!\f[] . end .. . .foo .bar Joe ⇒ Hello Joe!
Since \f
has no expansion, it isn’t necessary to protect its
backslash. Had we defined another macro within bar
that takes a
parameter, eight backslashes would be necessary before ‘$1’.
The de1
request turns off compatibility mode while executing the
macro. On entry, the current compatibility mode is saved and restored
at exit.
.nr xxx 12345 . .de aa The value of xxx is \\n[xxx]. .. .de1 bb The value of xxx is \\n[xxx]. .. . .cp 1 . .aa ⇒ warning: number register `[' not defined ⇒ The value of xxx is 0xxx]. .bb ⇒ The value of xxx is 12345.
The dei
request defines a macro indirectly. That is, it expands
strings whose names are name or end before performing the
append.
This:
.ds xx aa .ds yy bb .dei xx yy
is equivalent to:
.de aa bb
The dei1
request is similar to dei
but with compatibility
mode switched off during execution of the defined macro.
If compatibility mode is on, de
(and dei
) behave similar
to de1
(and dei1
): A ‘compatibility save’ token is
inserted at the beginning, and a ‘compatibility restore’ token at the
end, with compatibility mode switched on during execution. See Gtroff Internals, for more information on switching compatibility mode on and
off in a single document.
Using trace.tmac, you can trace calls to de
and
de1
.
Note that macro identifiers are shared with identifiers for strings and diversions.
See the description of the als
request, for possible
pitfalls if redefining a macro that has been aliased.
Works similarly to de
except it appends onto the macro named
name. So, to make the previously defined ‘P’ macro actually
do indented instead of block paragraphs, add the necessary code to the
existing macro like this:
.am P .ti +5n ..
The am1
request turns off compatibility mode while executing the
appended macro piece. To be more precise, a compatibility save
input token is inserted at the beginning of the appended code, and a
compatibility restore input token at the end.
The ami
request appends indirectly, meaning that gtroff
expands strings whose names are name or end before
performing the append.
The ami1
request is similar to ami
but compatibility mode
is switched off during execution of the defined macro.
Using trace.tmac, you can trace calls to am
and
am1
.
See Strings, for the als
and rn
request to create an
alias and rename a macro, respectively.
The de
, am
, di
, da
, ds
, and as
requests (together with their variants) only create a new object if the
name of the macro, diversion or string is currently undefined
or if it is defined to be a request; normally they modify the value of
an existing object.
Exit a macro, immediately returning to the caller.
If called with an argument, exit twice, namely the current macro and the
macro one level higher. This is used to define a wrapper macro for
return
in trace.tmac.
• Copy-in Mode: | ||
• Parameters: |
Next: Parameters, Previous: Writing Macros, Up: Writing Macros [Contents][Index]
When gtroff
reads in the text for a macro, string, or diversion,
it copies the text (including request lines, but excluding escapes) into
an internal buffer.
Escapes are converted into an internal form, except for \n
,
\$
, \*
, \\
and \RET
, which are evaluated
and inserted into the text where the escape was located.
This is known as copy-in mode or copy mode.
What this means is that you can specify when these escapes are to be
evaluated (either at copy-in time or at the time of use) by insulating
the escapes with an extra backslash. Compare this to the \def
and \edef
commands in TeX.
The following example prints the numbers 20 and 10:
.nr x 20 .de y .nr x 10 \&\nx \&\\nx .. .y
Previous: Copy-in Mode, Up: Writing Macros [Contents][Index]
The arguments to a macro or string can be examined using a variety of escapes.
The number of arguments passed to a macro or string. This is a read-only number register.
Note that the shift
request can change its value.
Any individual argument can be retrieved with one of the following escapes:
Retrieve the nth, nnth or nnnth argument. As usual, the first form only accepts a single number (larger than zero), the second a two-digit number (larger or equal to 10), and the third any positive integer value (larger than zero). Macros and strings can have an unlimited number of arguments. Note that due to copy-in mode, use two backslashes on these in actual use to prevent interpolation until the macro is actually invoked.
Shift the arguments 1 position, or as many positions as specified by its argument. After executing this request, argument i becomes argument i-n; arguments 1 to n are no longer available. Shifting by negative amounts is currently undefined.
The register .$
is adjusted accordingly.
In some cases it is convenient to use all of the arguments at once (for
example, to pass the arguments along to another macro). The \$*
escape concatenates all the arguments separated by spaces. A similar
escape is \$@
, which concatenates all the arguments with each
surrounded by double quotes, and separated by spaces. If not in
compatibility mode, the input level of double quotes is preserved (see
Request and Macro Arguments).
Handle the parameters of a macro as if they were an argument to the
ds
or similar requests.
.de foo . tm $1=`\\$1' . tm $2=`\\$2' . tm $*=`\\$*' . tm $@=`\\$@' . tm $^=`\\$^' .. .foo " This is a "test" ⇒ $1=` This is a ' ⇒ $2=`test"' ⇒ $*=` This is a test"' ⇒ $@=`" This is a " "test""' ⇒ $^=`" This is a "test"'
This escape is useful mainly for macro packages like trace.tmac, which redefines some requests and macros for debugging purposes.
The name used to invoke the current macro. The als
request can
make a macro have more than one name.
If a macro is called as a string (within another macro), the value of
\$0
isn’t changed.
.de foo . tm \\$0 .. .als foo bar .
.de aaa . foo .. .de bbb . bar .. .de ccc \\*[foo]\\ .. .de ddd \\*[bar]\\ .. .
.aaa ⇒ foo .bbb ⇒ bar .ccc ⇒ ccc .ddd ⇒ ddd
See Request and Macro Arguments.
Next: Drawing Requests, Previous: Writing Macros, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
See Manipulating Spacing, for a discussion of the main request for
vertical motion, sp
.
The request mk
can be used to mark a location on a page, for
movement to later. This request takes a register name as an argument in
which to store the current page location. With no argument it stores
the location in an internal register. The results of this can be used
later by the rt
or the sp
request (or the \v
escape).
The rt
request returns upwards to the location marked with
the last mk
request. If used with an argument, return to a
position which distance from the top of the page is dist (no
previous call to mk
is necessary in this case). Default scaling
indicator is ‘v’.
If a page break occurs between a mk
request and its
matching rt
request, the rt
is silently ignored.
Here a primitive solution for a two-column macro.
.nr column-length 1.5i .nr column-gap 4m .nr bottom-margin 1m .
.de 2c . br . mk . ll \\n[column-length]u . wh -\\n[bottom-margin]u 2c-trap . nr right-side 0 .. .
.de 2c-trap . ie \\n[right-side] \{\ . nr right-side 0 . po -(\\n[column-length]u + \\n[column-gap]u) . \" remove trap . wh -\\n[bottom-margin]u . \} . el \{\ . \" switch to right side . nr right-side 1 . po +(\\n[column-length]u + \\n[column-gap]u) . rt . \} .. .
.pl 1.5i .ll 4i This is a small test that shows how the rt request works in combination with mk. .2c Starting here, text is typeset in two columns. Note that this implementation isn't robust and thus not suited for a real two-column macro.
Result:
This is a small test that shows how the rt request works in combination with mk. Starting here, isn't robust text is typeset and thus not in two columns. suited for a Note that this real two-column implementation macro.
The following escapes give fine control of movements about the page.
Move vertically, usually from the current location on the page (if no
absolute position operator ‘|’ is used). The argument e
specifies the distance to move; positive is downwards and negative
upwards. The default scaling indicator for this escape is ‘v’.
Beware, however, that gtroff
continues text processing at the
point where the motion ends, so you should always balance motions to
avoid interference with text processing.
\v
doesn’t trigger a trap. This can be quite useful; for
example, consider a page bottom trap macro that prints a marker in the
margin to indicate continuation of a footnote or something similar.
There are some special-case escapes for vertical motion.
Move upwards 1v.
Move upwards .5v.
Move down .5v.
Move horizontally, usually from the current location (if no absolute position operator ‘|’ is used). The expression e indicates how far to move: positive is rightwards and negative leftwards. The default scaling indicator for this escape is ‘m’.
This horizontal space is not discarded at the end of a line. To insert
discardable space of a certain length use the ss
request.
There are a number of special-case escapes for horizontal motion.
An unbreakable and unpaddable (i.e. not expanded during filling) space. (Note: This is a backslash followed by a space.)
An unbreakable space that stretches like a normal inter-word space when a line is adjusted.
A 1/6th em space. Ignored for TTY output devices (rounded to zero).
However, if there is a glyph defined in the current font file with name
\|
(note the leading backslash), the width of this glyph is used
instead (even for TTYs).
A 1/12th em space. Ignored for TTY output devices (rounded to zero).
However, if there is a glyph defined in the current font file with name
\^
(note the leading backslash), the width of this glyph is used
instead (even for TTYs).
A space the size of a digit.
The following string sets the TeX logo:
.ds TeX T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
Return the width of the specified text in basic units. This allows horizontal movement based on the width of some arbitrary text (e.g. given as an argument to a macro).
The length of the string `abc' is \w'abc'u. ⇒ The length of the string `abc' is 72u.
Font changes may occur in text, which don’t affect current settings.
After use, \w
sets several registers:
st
sb
The highest and lowest point of the baseline, respectively, in text.
rst
rsb
Like the st
and sb
registers, but takes account of the
heights and depths of glyphs. In other words, this gives the highest
and lowest point of text. Values below the baseline are negative.
ct
Defines the kinds of glyphs occurring in text:
only short glyphs, no descenders or tall glyphs.
at least one descender.
at least one tall glyph.
at least one each of a descender and a tall glyph.
ssc
The amount of horizontal space (possibly negative) that should be added to the last glyph before a subscript.
skw
How far to right of the center of the last glyph in the \w
argument, the center of an accent from a roman font should be placed
over that glyph.
Store the current horizontal position in the input line in number register with name position (one-character name p, two-character name ps). Use this, for example, to return to the beginning of a string for highlighting or other decoration.
The current horizontal position at the input line.
A read-only number register containing the current horizontal output position (relative to the current indentation).
Overstrike glyphs a, b, c, …; the glyphs are centered, and the resulting spacing is the largest width of the affected glyphs.
Print glyph g with zero width, i.e., without spacing. Use this to overstrike glyphs left-aligned.
Print anything, then restore the horizontal and vertical position. The argument may not contain tabs or leaders.
The following is an example of a strike-through macro:
.de ST .nr ww \w'\\$1' \Z@\v'-.25m'\l'\\n[ww]u'@\\$1 .. . This is .ST "a test" an actual emergency!
Next: Traps, Previous: Page Motions, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
gtroff
provides a number of ways to draw lines and other figures
on the page. Used in combination with the page motion commands (see
Page Motions, for more info), a wide variety of figures can be
drawn. However, for complex drawings these operations can be quite
cumbersome, and it may be wise to use graphic preprocessors like
gpic
or ggrn
. See gpic, and ggrn, for more
information.
All drawing is done via escapes.
Draw a line horizontally. l is the length of the line to be drawn. If it is positive, start the line at the current location and draw to the right; its end point is the new current location. Negative values are handled differently: The line starts at the current location and draws to the left, but the current location doesn’t move.
l can also be specified absolutely (i.e. with a leading ‘|’), which draws back to the beginning of the input line. Default scaling indicator is ‘m’.
The optional second parameter g is a glyph to draw the line
with. If this second argument is not specified, gtroff
uses the
underscore glyph, \[ru]
.
To separate the two arguments (to prevent gtroff
from
interpreting a drawing glyph as a scaling indicator if the glyph is
represented by a single character) use \&
.
Here a small useful example:
.de box \[br]\\$*\[br]\l'|0\[rn]'\l'|0\[ul]' ..
Note that this works by outputting a box rule (a vertical line), then the text given as an argument and then another box rule. Finally, the line drawing escapes both draw from the current location to the beginning of the input line – this works because the line length is negative, not moving the current point.
Draw vertical lines. Its parameters are similar to the \l
escape, except that the default scaling indicator is ‘v’. The
movement is downwards for positive values, and upwards for negative
values. The default glyph is the box rule glyph, \[br]
. As with
the vertical motion escapes, text processing blindly continues where the
line ends.
This is a \L'3v'test.
Here is the result, produced with grotty
.
This is a | | |test.
The \D
escape provides a variety of drawing functions. Note that
on character devices, only vertical and horizontal lines are supported
within grotty
; other devices may only support a subset of the
available drawing functions.
The default scaling indicator for all subcommands of \D
is
‘m’ for horizontal distances and ‘v’ for vertical ones.
Exceptions are \D'f …'
and \D't …'
,
which use u
as the default, and \D'Fx …'
,
which arguments are treated similar to the defcolor
request.
\D'l dx dy'
Draw a line from the current location to the relative point specified by (dx,dy), where positive values mean right and down, respectively. The end point of the line is the new current location.
The following example is a macro for creating a box around a text string; for simplicity, the box margin is taken as a fixed value, 0.2m.
.de BOX . nr @wd \w'\\$1' \h'.2m'\ \h'-.2m'\v'(.2m - \\n[rsb]u)'\ \D'l 0 -(\\n[rst]u - \\n[rsb]u + .4m)'\ \D'l (\\n[@wd]u + .4m) 0'\ \D'l 0 (\\n[rst]u - \\n[rsb]u + .4m)'\ \D'l -(\\n[@wd]u + .4m) 0'\ \h'.2m'\v'-(.2m - \\n[rsb]u)'\ \\$1\ \h'.2m' ..
First, the width of the string is stored in register @wd
. Then,
four lines are drawn to form a box, properly offset by the box margin.
The registers rst
and rsb
are set by the \w
escape,
containing the largest height and depth of the whole string.
\D'c d'
Draw a circle with a diameter of d with the leftmost point at the current position. After drawing, the current location is positioned at the rightmost point of the circle.
\D'C d'
Draw a solid circle with the same parameters and behaviour as an outlined circle. No outline is drawn.
\D'e x y'
Draw an ellipse with a horizontal diameter of x and a vertical diameter of y with the leftmost point at the current position. After drawing, the current location is positioned at the rightmost point of the ellipse.
\D'E x y'
Draw a solid ellipse with the same parameters and behaviour as an outlined ellipse. No outline is drawn.
\D'a dx1 dy1 dx2 dy2'
Draw an arc clockwise from the current location through the two specified relative locations (dx1,dy1) and (dx2,dy2). The coordinates of the first point are relative to the current position, and the coordinates of the second point are relative to the first point. After drawing, the current position is moved to the final point of the arc.
\D'~ dx1 dy1 dx2 dy2 …'
Draw a spline from the current location to the relative point (dx1,dy1) and then to (dx2,dy2), and so on. The current position is moved to the terminal point of the drawn curve.
\D'f n'
Set the shade of gray to be used for filling solid objects to n; n must be an integer between 0 and 1000, where 0 corresponds solid white and 1000 to solid black, and values in between correspond to intermediate shades of gray. This applies only to solid circles, solid ellipses, and solid polygons. By default, a level of 1000 is used.
Despite of being silly, the current point is moved horizontally to the right by n.
Don’t use this command! It has the serious drawback that it is always
rounded to the next integer multiple of the horizontal resolution (the
value of the hor
keyword in the DESC file). Use \M
(see Colors) or \D'Fg …'
instead.
\D'p dx1 dy1 dx2 dy2 …'
Draw a polygon from the current location to the relative position (dx1,dy1) and then to (dx2,dy2) and so on. When the specified data points are exhausted, a line is drawn back to the starting point. The current position is changed by adding the sum of all arguments with odd index to the actual horizontal position and the even ones to the vertical position.
\D'P dx1 dy1 dx2 dy2 …'
Draw a solid polygon with the same parameters and behaviour as an outlined polygon. No outline is drawn.
Here a better variant of the box macro to fill the box with some color.
Note that the box must be drawn before the text since colors in
gtroff
are not transparent; the filled polygon would hide the
text completely.
.de BOX . nr @wd \w'\\$1' \h'.2m'\ \h'-.2m'\v'(.2m - \\n[rsb]u)'\ \M[lightcyan]\ \D'P 0 -(\\n[rst]u - \\n[rsb]u + .4m) \ (\\n[@wd]u + .4m) 0 \ 0 (\\n[rst]u - \\n[rsb]u + .4m) \ -(\\n[@wd]u + .4m) 0'\ \h'.2m'\v'-(.2m - \\n[rsb]u)'\ \M[]\ \\$1\ \h'.2m' ..
If you want a filled polygon that has exactly the same size as an unfilled one, you must draw both an unfilled and a filled polygon. A filled polygon is always smaller than an unfilled one because the latter uses straight lines with a given line thickness to connect the polygon’s corners, while the former simply fills the area defined by the coordinates.
\h'1i'\v'1i'\ \# increase line thickness \Z'\D't 5p''\ \# draw unfilled polygon \Z'\D'p 3 3 -6 0''\ \# draw filled polygon \Z'\D'P 3 3 -6 0''
\D't n'
Set the current line thickness to n machine units. A value
of zero selects the smallest available line thickness. A negative value
makes the line thickness proportional to the current point size (this is
the default behaviour of AT&T troff
).
Despite of being silly, the current point is moved horizontally to the right by n.
\D'Fscheme color_components'
Change current fill color. scheme is a single letter denoting the
color scheme: ‘r’ (rgb), ‘c’ (cmy), ‘k’ (cmyk), ‘g’
(gray), or ‘d’ (default color). The color components use exactly
the same syntax as in the defcolor
request (see Colors); the
command \D'Fd'
doesn’t take an argument.
No position changing!
Examples:
\D'Fg .3' \" same gray as \D'f 700' \D'Fr #0000ff' \" blue
See Graphics Commands.
Pile a sequence of glyphs vertically, and center it vertically on the current line. Use it to build large brackets and braces.
Here an example how to create a large opening brace:
\b'\[lt]\[bv]\[lk]\[bv]\[lb]'
The first glyph is on the top, the last glyph in string is at the
bottom. Note that gtroff
separates the glyphs vertically by
1m, and the whole object is centered 0.5m above the current
baseline; the largest glyph width is used as the width for the whole
object. This rather unflexible positioning algorithm doesn’t work with
-Tdvi since the bracket pieces vary in height for this device.
Instead, use the eqn
preprocessor.
See Manipulating Spacing, how to adjust the vertical spacing with the
\x
escape.
Next: Diversions, Previous: Drawing Requests, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
Traps are locations that, when reached, call a specified macro. These traps can occur at a given location on the page, at a given location in the current diversion, at a blank line, after a certain number of input lines, or at the end of input.
Setting a trap is also called planting. It is also said that a trap is sprung if the associated macro is executed.
• Page Location Traps: | ||
• Diversion Traps: | ||
• Input Line Traps: | ||
• Blank Line Traps: | ||
• Leading Spaces Traps: | ||
• End-of-input Traps: |
Next: Diversion Traps, Previous: Traps, Up: Traps [Contents][Index]
Page location traps perform an action when gtroff
reaches
or passes a certain vertical location on the page. Page location traps
have a variety of purposes, including:
Enable vertical position traps if flag is non-zero, or disables
them otherwise. Vertical position traps are traps set by the wh
or dt
requests. Traps set by the it
request are not
vertical position traps. The parameter that controls whether vertical
position traps are enabled is global. Initially vertical position traps
are enabled. The current setting of this is available in the
.vpt
read-only number register.
Note that a page can’t be ejected if vpt
is set to zero.
Set a page location trap. Non-negative values for dist set the
trap relative to the top of the page; negative values set the trap
relative to the bottom of the page. Default scaling indicator is
‘v’; values of dist are always rounded to be multiples of the
vertical resolution (as given in register .V
).
macro is the name of the macro to execute when the trap is sprung. If macro is missing, remove the first trap (if any) at dist.
The following is a simple example of how many macro packages set headers and footers.
.de hd \" Page header ' sp .5i . tl 'Title''date' ' sp .3i .. . .de fo \" Page footer ' sp 1v . tl ''%'' ' bp .. . .wh 0 hd \" trap at top of the page .wh -1i fo \" trap one inch from bottom
A trap at or below the bottom of the page is ignored; it can be made active by either moving it up or increasing the page length so that the trap is on the page.
Negative trap values always use the current page length; they are not converted to an absolute vertical position:
.pl 5i .wh -1i xx .ptr ⇒ xx -240 .pl 100i .ptr ⇒ xx -240
It is possible to have more than one trap at the same location; to do
so, the traps must be defined at different locations, then moved
together with the ch
request; otherwise the second trap would
replace the first one. Earlier defined traps hide later defined traps
if moved to the same position (the many empty lines caused by the
bp
request are omitted in the following example):
.de a . nop a .. .de b . nop b .. .de c . nop c .. . .wh 1i a .wh 2i b .wh 3i c .bp ⇒ a b c
.ch b 1i .ch c 1i .bp ⇒ a
.ch a 0.5i .bp ⇒ a b
A read-only number register holding the distance to the next trap.
If there are no traps between the current position and the bottom of the
page, it contains the distance to the page bottom. In a diversion, the
distance to the page bottom is infinite (the returned value is the
biggest integer that can be represented in groff
) if there are
no diversion traps.
Change the location of a trap. The first argument is the name of the
macro to be invoked at the trap, and the second argument is the new
location for the trap (note that the parameters are specified in
opposite order as in the wh
request). This is useful for
building up footnotes in a diversion to allow more space at the bottom
of the page for them.
Default scaling indicator for dist is ‘v’. If dist is missing, the trap is removed.
The read-only number register .ne
contains the amount of space
that was needed in the last ne
request that caused a trap to be
sprung. Useful in conjunction with the .trunc
register.
See Page Control, for more information.
Since the .ne
register is only set by traps it doesn’t make much
sense to use it outside of trap macros.
A read-only register containing the amount of vertical space truncated
from an sp
request by the most recently sprung vertical
position trap, or, if the trap was sprung by an ne
request,
minus the amount of vertical motion produced by the ne
request. In other words, at the point a trap is sprung, it
represents the difference of what the vertical position would have
been but for the trap, and what the vertical position actually is.
Since the .trunc
register is only set by traps it doesn’t make
much sense to use it outside of trap macros.
A read-only register that is set to 1 while a page is ejected with
the bp
request (or by the end of input).
Outside of traps this register is always zero. In the following
example, only the second call to x
is caused by bp
.
.de x \&.pe=\\n[.pe] .br .. .wh 1v x .wh 4v x A line. .br Another line. .br ⇒ A line. .pe=0 Another line. .pe=1
An important fact to consider while designing macros is that diversions
and traps do not interact normally. For example, if a trap invokes a
header macro (while outputting a diversion) that tries to change the
font on the current page, the effect is not visible before the diversion
has completely been printed (except for input protected with \!
or \?
) since the data in the diversion is already formatted. In
most cases, this is not the expected behaviour.
Next: Input Line Traps, Previous: Page Location Traps, Up: Traps [Contents][Index]
Set a trap within a diversion. dist is the location of the
trap (identical to the wh
request; default scaling indicator is
‘v’) and macro is the name of the macro to be invoked. If
called without arguments, the diversion trap is removed.
Note that there exists only a single diversion trap.
The number register .t
still works within diversions.
See Diversions, for more information.
Next: Blank Line Traps, Previous: Diversion Traps, Up: Traps [Contents][Index]
Set an input line trap. n is the number of lines of input that may be read before springing the trap, macro is the macro to be invoked. Request lines are not counted as input lines.
For example, one possible use is to have a macro that prints the next n lines in a bold font.
.de B . it \\$1 B-end . ft B .. . .de B-end . ft R ..
The itc
request is identical except that an interrupted text line
(ending with \c
) is not counted as a separate line.
Both requests are associated with the current environment (see Environments); switching to another environment disables the current input trap, and going back reactivates it, restoring the number of already processed lines.
Next: Leading Spaces Traps, Previous: Input Line Traps, Up: Traps [Contents][Index]
Set a blank line trap. gtroff
executes macro when it
encounters a blank line in the input file.
Next: End-of-input Traps, Previous: Blank Line Traps, Up: Traps [Contents][Index]
Set a leading spaces trap. gtroff
executes macro when it
encounters leading spaces in an input line; the implicit line break
that normally happens in this case is suppressed. A line consisting
of spaces only, however, is treated as an empty line, possibly subject
to an empty line macro set with the blm
request.
Leading spaces are removed from the input line before calling the
leading spaces macro. The number of removed spaces is stored in
register lsn
; the horizontal space that would be emitted if
there was no leading space macro is stored in register lss
.
Note that lsn
and lss
are available even if no leading
space macro has been set.
The first thing a leading space macro sees is a token. However, some
escapes like \f
or \m
are handled on the fly (see
Gtroff Internals, for a complete list) without creating a token
at all. Consider that a line starts with two spaces followed by
\fIfoo
. While skipping the spaces \fI
is handled too so
that groff’s current font is properly set to ‘I’, but the leading
space macro only sees foo
, without the preceding \fI
.
If the macro should see the font escape you have to ‘protect’ it with
something that creates a token, for example with \&\fIfoo
.
Previous: Leading Spaces Traps, Up: Traps [Contents][Index]
Set a trap at the end of input. macro is executed after the last line of the input file has been processed.
For example, if the document had to have a section at the bottom of the
last page for someone to approve it, the em
request could be
used.
.de approval \c . ne 3v . sp (\\n[.t]u - 3v) . in +4i . lc _ . br Approved:\t\a . sp Date:\t\t\a .. . .em approval
The \c
in the above example needs explanation. For historical
reasons (and for compatibility with AT&T troff
), the
end macro exits as soon as it causes a page break and no remaining
data is in the partially collected line.
Let us assume that there is no \c
in the above approval
macro, and that the page is full and has been ended with, say, a
br
request. The ne
request now causes the start of a new
page, which in turn makes troff
exit immediately for the reasons
just described. In most situations this is not intended.
To always force processing the whole end macro independently of this
behaviour it is thus advisable to insert something that starts an
empty partially filled line (\c
) whenever there is a chance that
a page break can happen. In the above example, the call of the
ne
request assures that the remaining code stays on the same
page, so we have to insert \c
only once.
The next example shows how to append three lines, then starting a new page unconditionally. Since ‘.ne 1’ doesn’t give the desired effect – there is always one line available or we are already at the beginning of the next page – we temporarily increase the page length by one line so that we can use ‘.ne 2’.
.de EM .pl +1v \c .ne 2 line one .br \c .ne 2 line two .br \c .ne 2 line three .br .pl -1v \c 'bp .. .em EM
Note that this specific feature affects only the first potential page break caused by the end macro; further page breaks emitted by the end macro are handled normally.
Another possible use of the em
request is to make gtroff
emit a single large page instead of multiple pages. For example, one
may want to produce a long plain-text file for reading on-screen. The
idea is to set the page length at the beginning of the document to a
very large value to hold all the text, and automatically adjust it to
the exact height of the document after the text has been output.
.de adjust-page-length . br . pl \\n[nl]u \" \n[nl] holds the current vert. position .. . .de single-page-mode . pl 99999 . em adjust-page-length .. . .\" activate the above code .single-page-mode
Since only one end-of-input trap does exist and other macro packages
may already use it, care must be taken not to break the mechanism. A
simple solution would be to append the above macro to the macro
package’s end-of-input macro using the .am
request.
Next: Environments, Previous: Traps, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
In gtroff
it is possible to divert text into a named
storage area. Due to the similarity to defining macros it is sometimes
said to be stored in a macro. This is used for saving text for output
at a later time, which is useful for keeping blocks of text on the same
page, footnotes, tables of contents, and indices.
For orthogonality it is said that gtroff
is in the top-level
diversion if no diversion is active (i.e., the data is diverted to the
output device).
Although the following requests can be used to create diversions, simply using an undefined diversion will cause it to be defined as empty. See Identifiers.
Begin a diversion. Like the de
request, it takes an argument of
a macro name to divert subsequent text into. The da
macro
appends to an existing diversion.
di
or da
without an argument ends the diversion.
The current partially filled line is included into the diversion. See
the box
request below for an example. Note that switching to
another (empty) environment (with the ev
request) avoids the
inclusion of the current partially filled line.
Begin (or append to) a diversion like the di
and da
requests. The difference is that box
and boxa
do not
include a partially filled line in the diversion.
Compare this:
Before the box. .box xxx In the box. .br .box After the box. .br ⇒ Before the box. After the box. .xxx ⇒ In the box.
with this:
Before the diversion. .di yyy In the diversion. .br .di After the diversion. .br ⇒ After the diversion. .yyy ⇒ Before the diversion. In the diversion.
box
or boxa
without an argument ends the diversion.
Diversions may be nested. The read-only number register .z
contains the name of the current diversion (this is a string-valued
register). The read-only number register .d
contains the current
vertical place in the diversion. If not in a diversion it is the same
as register nl
.
The high-water mark on the current page or in the current diversion. It corresponds to the text baseline of the lowest line on the page. This is a read-only register.
.tm .h==\n[.h], nl==\n[nl] ⇒ .h==0, nl==-1 This is a test. .br .sp 2 .tm .h==\n[.h], nl==\n[nl] ⇒ .h==40, nl==120
As can be seen in the previous example, empty lines are not considered
in the return value of the .h
register.
After completing a diversion, the read-write number registers dn
and dl
contain the vertical and horizontal size of the diversion.
Note that only the just processed lines are counted: For the computation
of dn
and dl
, the requests da
and boxa
are
handled as if di
and box
had been used – lines that have
been already stored in a macro are not taken into account.
.\" Center text both horizontally & vertically . .\" Enclose macro definitions in .eo and .ec .\" to avoid the doubling of the backslash .eo .\" macro .(c starts centering mode .de (c . br . ev (c . evc 0 . in 0 . nf . di @c ..
.\" macro .)c terminates centering mode .de )c . br . ev . di . nr @s (((\n[.t]u - \n[dn]u) / 2u) - 1v) . sp \n[@s]u . ce 1000 . @c . ce 0 . sp \n[@s]u . br . fi . rr @s . rm @c .. .\" End of macro definitions, restore escape mechanism .ec
Prevent requests, macros, and escapes from being interpreted when read into a diversion. Both escapes take the given text and transparently embed it into the diversion. This is useful for macros that shouldn’t be invoked until the diverted text is actually output.
The \!
escape transparently embeds text up to and including the
end of the line. The \?
escape transparently embeds text until
the next occurrence of the \?
escape. Example:
\?anything\?
anything may not contain newlines; use \!
to embed
newlines in a diversion. The escape sequence \?
is also
recognized in copy mode and turned into a single internal code; it is
this code that terminates anything. Thus the following example
prints 4.
.nr x 1 .nf .di d \?\\?\\\\?\\\\\\\\nx\\\\?\\?\? .di .nr x 2 .di e .d .di .nr x 3 .di f .e .di .nr x 4 .f
Both escapes read the data in copy mode.
If \!
is used in the top-level diversion, its argument is
directly embedded into the gtroff
intermediate output. This can
be used for example to control a postprocessor that processes the data
before it is sent to the device driver.
The \?
escape used in the top-level diversion produces no output
at all; its argument is simply ignored.
Emit string directly to the gtroff
intermediate output
(subject to copy mode interpretation); this is similar to \!
used
at the top level. An initial double quote in string is stripped
off to allow initial blanks.
This request can’t be used before the first page has started – if you
get an error, simply insert .br
before the output
request.
Without argument, output
is ignored.
Use with caution! It is normally only needed for mark-up used by a postprocessor that does something with the output before sending it to the output device, filtering out string again.
Unformat the diversion specified by div in such a way that
ASCII characters, characters translated with the trin
request, space characters, and some escape sequences that were formatted
and diverted are treated like ordinary input characters when the
diversion is reread. It can be also used for gross hacks; for example,
the following sets register n
to 1.
.tr @. .di x @nr n 1 .br .di .tr @@ .asciify x .x
Note that asciify
cannot return all items in a diversion back
to their source equivalent, nodes such as \N[...]
will still
remain as nodes, so the result cannot be guaranteed to be a pure string.
See Copy-in Mode.
Like asciify
, unformat the specified diversion. However,
unformat
only unformats spaces and tabs between words.
Unformatted tabs are treated as input tokens, and spaces are stretchable
again.
The vertical size of lines is not preserved; glyph information (font, font size, space width, etc.) is retained.
Next: Suppressing output, Previous: Diversions, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
It happens frequently that some text should be printed in a certain
format regardless of what may be in effect at the time, for example, in
a trap invoked macro to print headers and footers. To solve this
gtroff
processes text in environments. An environment
contains most of the parameters that control text processing. It is
possible to switch amongst these environments; by default gtroff
processes text in environment 0. The following is the information
kept in an environment.
These environments may be given arbitrary names (see Identifiers,
for more info). Old versions of troff
only had environments
named ‘0’, ‘1’, and ‘2’.
Switch to another environment. The argument env is the name of
the environment to switch to. With no argument, gtroff
switches
back to the previous environment. There is no limit on the number of
named environments; they are created the first time that they are
referenced. The .ev
read-only register contains the name or
number of the current environment. This is a string-valued register.
Note that a call to ev
(with argument) pushes the previously
active environment onto a stack. If, say, environments ‘foo’,
‘bar’, and ‘zap’ are called (in that order), the first
ev
request without parameter switches back to environment
‘bar’ (which is popped off the stack), and a second call switches
back to environment ‘foo’.
Here is an example:
.ev footnote-env .fam N .ps 6 .vs 8 .ll -.5i .ev ... .ev footnote-env \(dg Note the large, friendly letters. .ev
Copy the environment env into the current environment.
The following environment data is not copied:
The \n[.w]
register contains the width of the last glyph added to
the current environment.
The \n[.cht]
register contains the height of the last glyph added
to the current environment.
The \n[.cdp]
register contains the depth of the last glyph added
to the current environment. It is positive for glyphs extending below
the baseline.
The \n[.csk]
register contains the skew (how far to the
right of the glyph’s center that gtroff
should place an accent)
of the last glyph added to the current environment.
The \n[.n]
register contains the length of the previous output
line in the current environment.
Next: Colors, Previous: Environments, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
Disable or enable output depending on the value of num:
Disable any glyphs from being emitted to the device driver, provided
that the escape occurs at the outer level (see \O[3]
and
\O[4]
). Motion is not suppressed so effectively \O[0]
means pen up.
Enable output of glyphs, provided that the escape occurs at the outer level.
\O0
and \O1
also reset the four registers ‘opminx’,
‘opminy’, ‘opmaxx’, and ‘opmaxy’ to -1.
See Register Index. These four registers mark the top left and
bottom right hand corners of a box that encompasses all written glyphs.
For example the input text:
Hello \O[0]world \O[1]this is a test.
produces the following output:
Hello this is a test.
Provided that the escape occurs at the outer level, enable output of
glyphs and also write out to stderr
the page number and four
registers encompassing the glyphs previously written since the last call
to \O
.
Begin a nesting level. At start-up, gtroff
is at outer level.
The current level is contained within the read-only register .O
.
See Built-in Registers.
End a nesting level. The current level is contained within the
read-only register .O
. See Built-in Registers.
This escape is grohtml
specific. Provided that this escape
occurs at the outer nesting level write the filename
to
stderr
. The position of the image, P, must be specified
and must be one of l
, r
, c
, or i
(left,
right, centered, inline). filename is associated with the
production of the next inline image.
Next: I/O, Previous: Suppressing output, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
If n is missing or non-zero, activate colors (this is the default); otherwise, turn it off.
The read-only number register .color
is 1 if colors are
active, 0 otherwise.
Internally, color
sets a global flag; it does not produce a
token. Similar to the cp
request, you should use it at the
beginning of your document to control color output.
Colors can be also turned off with the -c command-line option.
Define color with name ident. scheme can be one of the
following values: rgb
(three components), cmy
(three
components), cmyk
(four components), and gray
or
grey
(one component).
Color components can be given either as a hexadecimal string or as
positive decimal integers in the range 0–65535. A hexadecimal string
contains all color components concatenated. It must start with either
#
or ##
; the former specifies hex values in the range
0–255 (which are internally multiplied by 257), the latter in the
range 0–65535. Examples: #FFC0CB
(pink), ##ffff0000ffff
(magenta). The default color name value is device-specific (usually black). It is possible that the
default color for \m
and \M
is not identical.
A new scaling indicator f
has been introduced, which
multiplies its value by 65536; this makes it convenient to specify color
components as fractions in the range 0 to 1 (1f equals 65536u).
Example:
.defcolor darkgreen rgb 0.1f 0.5f 0.2f
Note that f
is the default scaling indicator for the
defcolor
request, thus the above statement is equivalent to
.defcolor darkgreen rgb 0.1 0.5 0.2
Set (glyph) drawing color. The following examples show how to turn the next four words red.
.gcolor red these are in red .gcolor and these words are in black.
\m[red]these are in red\m[] and these words are in black.
The escape \m[]
returns to the previous color, as does a call to
gcolor
without an argument.
The name of the current drawing color is available in the read-only, string-valued number register ‘.m’.
The drawing color is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
Note that \m
doesn’t produce an input token in gtroff
. As
a consequence, it can be used in requests like mc
(which expects
a single character as an argument) to change the color on the fly:
.mc \m[red]x\m[]
Set fill (background) color for filled objects drawn with the
\D'…'
commands.
A red ellipse can be created with the following code:
\M[red]\h'0.5i'\D'E 2i 1i'\M[]
The escape \M[]
returns to the previous fill color, as does a
call to fcolor
without an argument.
The name of the current fill (background) color is available in the read-only, string-valued number register ‘.M’.
The fill color is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
Note that \M
doesn’t produce an input token in gtroff
.
Next: Postprocessor Access, Previous: Colors, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
gtroff
has several requests for including files:
Read in the specified file and includes it in place of the
so
request. This is quite useful for large documents, e.g.
keeping each chapter in a separate file. See gsoelim, for more
information.
Since gtroff
replaces the so
request with the contents of
file
, it makes a difference whether the data is terminated with a
newline or not: Assuming that file xxx contains the word
‘foo’ without a final newline, this
This is .so xxx bar
yields ‘This is foobar’.
The search path for file can be controlled with the -I command-line option.
Read the standard output from the specified command and includes
it in place of the pso
request.
This request causes an error if used in safer mode (which is the
default). Use groff
’s or troff
’s -U option to
activate unsafe mode.
The comment regarding a final newline for the so
request is valid
for pso
also.
Identical to the so
request except that gtroff
searches
for the specified file in the same directories as macro files for
the -m command-line option.
If the file name to be included has the form name.tmac and it
isn’t found, mso
tries to include tmac.name and vice
versa.
If the file does not exist, a warning of type ‘file’ is emitted.
See Debugging, for information about warnings.
Transparently output the contents of file. Each line is output as
if it were preceded by \!
; however, the lines are not
subject to copy mode interpretation. If the file does not end with a
newline, then a newline is added (trf
only). For example, to
define a macro x
containing the contents of
file f, use
.ev 1 .di x .trf f .di .ev
The calls to ev
prevent that the current partial input line
becomes part of the diversion.
Both trf
and cf
, when used in a diversion, embeds an
object in the diversion which, when reread, causes the contents of
file to be transparently copied through to the output. In
Unix troff
, the contents of file is immediately copied
through to the output regardless of whether there is a current
diversion; this behaviour is so anomalous that it must be considered a
bug.
While cf
copies the contents of file completely
unprocessed, trf
disallows characters such as NUL that are not
valid gtroff
input characters (see Identifiers).
For cf
, within a diversion, ‘completely unprocessed’ means that
each line of a file to be inserted is handled as if it were preceded by
\!\\!
.
Both requests cause a line break.
Force gtroff
to continue processing of the file specified as an
argument. If no argument is given, immediately jump to the end of file.
Read from standard input, and include what is read as though it were part of the input file. Text is read until a blank line is encountered.
If standard input is a TTY input device (keyboard), write prompt to standard error, followed by a colon (or send BEL for a beep if no argument is given).
Arguments after prompt are available for the input. For example, the line
.rd data foo bar
with the input ‘This is \$2.’ prints
This is bar.
Using the nx
and rd
requests, it is easy to set up form
letters. The form letter template is constructed like this, putting the
following lines into a file called repeat.let:
.ce \*(td .sp 2 .nf .rd .sp .rd .fi Body of letter. .bp .nx repeat.let
When this is run, a file containing the following lines should be
redirected in. Note that requests included in this file are executed as
though they were part of the form letter. The last block of input is
the ex
request, which tells groff
to stop processing. If
this was not there, groff
would not know when to stop.
Trent A. Fisher 708 NW 19th Av., #202 Portland, OR 97209 Dear Trent, Len Adollar 4315 Sierra Vista San Diego, CA 92103 Dear Mr. Adollar, .ex
Pipe the output of gtroff
to the shell command(s) specified by
pipe. This request must occur before gtroff
has a chance
to print anything.
pi
causes an error if used in safer mode (which is the default).
Use groff
’s or troff
’s -U option to activate
unsafe mode.
Multiple calls to pi
are allowed, acting as a chain. For
example,
.pi foo .pi bar ...
is the same as ‘.pi foo | bar’.
Note that the intermediate output format of gtroff
is piped to
the specified commands. Consequently, calling groff
without the
-Z option normally causes a fatal error.
Execute the shell command(s) specified by cmds. The output is not saved anyplace, so it is up to the user to do so.
This request causes an error if used in safer mode (which is the
default). Use groff
’s or troff
’s -U option to
activate unsafe mode.
For example, the following code fragment introduces the current time into a document:
.sy perl -e 'printf ".nr H %d\\n.nr M %d\\n.nr S %d\\n",\ (localtime(time))[2,1,0]' > /tmp/x\n[$$] .so /tmp/x\n[$$] .sy rm /tmp/x\n[$$] \nH:\nM:\nS
Note that this works by having the perl
script (run by sy
)
print out the nr
requests that set the number registers
H
, M
, and S
, and then reads those commands in with
the so
request.
For most practical purposes, the number registers seconds
,
minutes
, and hours
, which are initialized at start-up of
gtroff
, should be sufficient. Use the af
request to get a
formatted output:
.af hours 00 .af minutes 00 .af seconds 00 \n[hours]:\n[minutes]:\n[seconds]
The systat
read-write number register contains the return value
of the system()
function executed by the last sy
request.
Open the specified file for writing and associates the specified stream with it.
The opena
request is like open
, but if the file exists,
append to it instead of truncating it.
Both open
and opena
cause an error if used in safer mode
(which is the default). Use groff
’s or troff
’s
-U option to activate unsafe mode.
Write to the file associated with the specified stream. The
stream must previously have been the subject of an open request. The
remainder of the line is interpreted as the ds
request reads its
second argument: A leading ‘"’ is stripped, and it is read in
copy-in mode.
The writec
request is like write
, but only write
appends a newline to the data.
Write the contents of the macro or string xx to the file associated with the specified stream.
xx is read in copy mode, i.e., already formatted elements are
ignored. Consequently, diversions must be unformatted with the
asciify
request before calling writem
. Usually, this
means a loss of information.
Close the specified stream; the stream is no longer an acceptable
argument to the write
request.
Here a simple macro to write an index entry.
.open idx test.idx . .de IX . write idx \\n[%] \\$* .. . .IX test entry . .close idx
Interpolate the contents of the specified environment variable env
(one-character name e, two-character name ev) as
returned by the function getenv
. \V
is interpreted in
copy-in mode.
Next: Miscellaneous, Previous: I/O, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
There are two escapes that give information directly to the postprocessor. This is particularly useful for embedding POSTSCRIPT into the final document.
Embeds its argument into the gtroff
output preceded with
‘x X’.
The escapes \&
, \)
, \%
, and \:
are ignored
within \X
, ‘\ ’ and \~
are converted to single
space characters. All other escapes (except \\
, which produces a
backslash) cause an error.
Contrary to \X
, the device
request simply processes its
argument in copy mode (see Copy-in Mode).
If the ‘use_charnames_in_special’ keyword is set in the DESC
file, special characters no longer cause an error; they are simply
output verbatim. Additionally, the backslash is represented as
\\
.
‘use_charnames_in_special’ is currently used by grohtml
only.
This is approximately equivalent to ‘\X'\*[name]'’
(one-character name n, two-character name nm).
However, the contents of the string or macro name are not
interpreted; also it is permitted for name to have been defined as
a macro and thus contain newlines (it is not permitted for the argument
to \X
to contain newlines). The inclusion of newlines requires
an extension to the Unix troff
output format, and confuses
drivers that do not know about this extension (see Device Control Commands).
See Output Devices.
Next: Gtroff Internals, Previous: Postprocessor Access, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
This section documents parts of gtroff
that cannot (yet) be
categorized elsewhere in this manual.
Print line numbers. start is the line number of the next output line. inc indicates which line numbers are printed. For example, the value 5 means to emit only line numbers that are multiples of 5; this defaults to 1. space is the space to be left between the number and the text; this defaults to one digit space. The fourth argument is the indentation of the line numbers, defaulting to zero. Both space and indent are given as multiples of digit spaces; they can be negative also. Without any arguments, line numbers are turned off.
gtroff
reserves three digit spaces for the line number (which is
printed right-justified) plus the amount given by indent; the
output lines are concatenated to the line numbers, separated by
space, and without reducing the line length. Depending on
the value of the horizontal page offset (as set with the po
request), line numbers that are longer than the reserved space stick
out to the left, or the whole line is moved to the right.
Parameters corresponding to missing arguments are not changed; any non-digit argument (to be more precise, any argument starting with a character valid as a delimiter for identifiers) is also treated as missing.
If line numbering has been disabled with a call to nm
without an
argument, it can be reactivated with ‘.nm +0’, using the previously
active line numbering parameters.
The parameters of nm
are associated with the current environment
(see Environments). The current output line number is available in
the number register ln
.
.po 1m .ll 2i This test shows how line numbering works with groff. .nm 999 This test shows how line numbering works with groff. .br .nm xxx 3 2 .ll -\w'0'u This test shows how line numbering works with groff. .nn 2 This test shows how line numbering works with groff.
And here the result:
This test shows how line numbering works 999 with groff. This 1000 test shows how line 1001 numbering works with 1002 groff. This test shows how line numbering works with groff. This test shows how 1005 line numbering works with groff.
Temporarily turn off line numbering. The argument is the number of lines not to be numbered; this defaults to 1.
Print a margin character to the right of the text.25 The first argument is the glyph to be printed. The second argument is the distance away from the right margin. If missing, the previously set value is used; default is 10pt). For text lines that are too long (that is, longer than the text length plus dist), the margin character is directly appended to the lines.
With no arguments the margin character is turned off. If this occurs before a break, no margin character is printed.
For compatibility with AT&T troff
, a call to mc
to set the margin character can’t be undone immediately; at least one
line gets a margin character. Thus
.ll 1i .mc \[br] .mc xxx .br xxx
produces
xxx | xxx
For empty lines and lines produced by the tl
request no margin
character is emitted.
The margin character is associated with the current environment (see Environments).
This is quite useful for indicating text that has changed, and, in fact,
there are programs available for doing this (they are called
nrchbar
and changebar
and can be found in any
‘comp.sources.unix’ archive).
.ll 3i .mc | This paragraph is highlighted with a margin character. .sp Note that vertical space isn't marked. .br \& .br But we can fake it with `\&'.
Result:
This paragraph is highlighted | with a margin character. | Note that vertical space isn't | marked. | | But we can fake it with `\&'. |
Retrieve the bounding box of the POSTSCRIPT image found in
filename. The file must conform to Adobe’s Document
Structuring Conventions (DSC); the command searches for a
%%BoundingBox
comment and extracts the bounding box values into
the number registers llx
, lly
, urx
, and ury
.
If an error occurs (for example, psbb
cannot find the
%%BoundingBox
comment), it sets the four number registers to
zero.
The search path for filename can be controlled with the -I command-line option.
Next: Debugging, Previous: Miscellaneous, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
gtroff
Internalsgtroff
processes input in three steps. One or more input
characters are converted to an input token.26 Then, one or more input tokens are converted to
an output node. Finally, output nodes are converted to the
intermediate output language understood by all output devices.
Actually, before step one happens, gtroff
converts certain escape
sequences into reserved input characters (not accessible by the user);
such reserved characters are used for other internal processing also –
this is the very reason why not all characters are valid input.
See Identifiers, for more on this topic.
For example, the input string ‘fi\[:u]’ is converted into a
character token ‘f’, a character token ‘i’, and a special
token ‘:u’ (representing u umlaut). Later on, the character
tokens ‘f’ and ‘i’ are merged to a single output node
representing the ligature glyph ‘fi’ (provided the current font has
a glyph for this ligature); the same happens with ‘:u’. All output
glyph nodes are ‘processed’, which means that they are invariably
associated with a given font, font size, advance width, etc. During the
formatting process, gtroff
itself adds various nodes to control
the data flow.
Macros, diversions, and strings collect elements in two chained lists: a list of input tokens that have been passed unprocessed, and a list of output nodes. Consider the following the diversion.
.di xxx a \!b c .br .di
It contains these elements.
node list | token list | element number |
line start node | — | 1 |
glyph node a | — | 2 |
word space node | — | 3 |
— | b | 4 |
— | \n | 5 |
glyph node c | — | 6 |
vertical size node | — | 7 |
vertical size node | — | 8 |
— | \n | 9 |
Elements 1, 7, and 8 are inserted by gtroff
; the latter two
(which are always present) specify the vertical extent of the last line,
possibly modified by \x
. The br
request finishes the
current partial line, inserting a newline input token, which is
subsequently converted to a space when the diversion is reread. Note
that the word space node has a fixed width that isn’t stretchable
anymore. To convert horizontal space nodes back to input tokens, use
the unformat
request.
Macros only contain elements in the token list (and the node list is empty); diversions and strings can contain elements in both lists.
Note that the chop
request simply reduces the number of elements
in a macro, string, or diversion by one. Exceptions are
compatibility save and compatibility ignore input tokens,
which are ignored. The substring
request also ignores those
input tokens.
Some requests like tr
or cflags
work on glyph identifiers
only; this means that the associated glyph can be changed without
destroying this association. This can be very helpful for substituting
glyphs. In the following example, we assume that glyph ‘foo’ isn’t
available by default, so we provide a substitution using the
fchar
request and map it to input character ‘x’.
.fchar \[foo] foo .tr x \[foo]
Now let us assume that we install an additional special font ‘bar’ that has glyph ‘foo’.
.special bar .rchar \[foo]
Since glyphs defined with fchar
are searched before glyphs in
special fonts, we must call rchar
to remove the definition of the
fallback glyph. Anyway, the translation is still active; ‘x’ now
maps to the real glyph ‘foo’.
Macro and request arguments preserve the compatibility mode:
.cp 1 \" switch to compatibility mode .de xx \\$1 .. .cp 0 \" switch compatibility mode off .xx caf\['e] ⇒ café
Since compatibility mode is on while de
is called, the macro
xx
activates compatibility mode while executing. Argument
$1
can still be handled properly because it inherits the
compatibility mode status which was active at the point where xx
is called.
After expansion of the parameters, the compatibility save and restore tokens are removed.
Next: Implementation Differences, Previous: Gtroff Internals, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
gtroff
is not easy to debug, but there are some useful features
and strategies for debugging.
Change the line number and optionally the file name gtroff
shall
use for error and warning messages. line is the input line number
of the next line.
Without argument, the request is ignored.
This is a debugging aid for documents that are split into many files,
then put together with soelim
and other preprocessors. Usually,
it isn’t invoked manually.
Note that other troff
implementations (including the original
AT&T version) handle lf
differently. For them,
line changes the line number of the current line.
Send string to the standard error output; this is very useful for printing debugging messages among other things.
string is read in copy mode.
The tm
request ignores leading spaces of string; tm1
handles its argument similar to the ds
request: a leading double
quote in string is stripped to allow initial blanks.
The tmc
request is similar to tm1
but does not append a
newline (as is done in tm
and tm1
).
Similar to the tm
request, except that it causes gtroff
to
stop processing. With no argument it prints ‘User Abort.’ to
standard error.
The ex
request also causes gtroff
to stop processing; see
also I/O.
When doing something involved it is useful to leave the debugging statements in the code and have them turned on by a command-line flag.
.if \n(DB .tm debugging output
To activate these statements say
groff -rDB=1 file
If it is known in advance that there are many errors and no useful
output, gtroff
can be forced to suppress formatted output with
the -z flag.
Print the contents of the current environment and all the currently
defined environments (both named and numbered) on stderr
.
Print the entire symbol table on stderr
. Names of all defined
macros, strings, and diversions are print together with their size in
bytes. Since gtroff
sometimes adds nodes by itself, the returned
size can be larger than expected.
This request differs from Unix troff
: gtroff
reports the
sizes of diversions, ignores an additional argument to print only the
total of the sizes, and the size isn’t returned in blocks of 128
characters.
Print the names and contents of all currently defined number registers
on stderr
.
Print the names and positions of all traps (not including input line
traps and diversion traps) on stderr
. Empty slots in the page
trap list are printed as well, because they can affect the priority of
subsequently planted traps.
Instruct gtroff
to flush its output immediately. The intent is
for interactive use, but this behaviour is currently not implemented in
gtroff
. Contrary to Unix troff
, TTY output is sent to a
device driver also (grotty
), making it non-trivial to communicate
interactively.
This request causes a line break.
Print a backtrace of the input stack to the standard error stream.
Consider the following in file test:
.de xxx . backtrace .. .de yyy . xxx .. . .yyy
On execution, gtroff
prints the following:
test:2: backtrace: macro `xxx' test:5: backtrace: macro `yyy' test:8: backtrace: file `test'
The option -b of gtroff
internally calls a variant of
this request on each error and warning.
Use the slimit
number register to set the maximum number of
objects on the input stack. If slimit
is less than or equal
to 0, there is no limit set. With no limit, a buggy recursive
macro can exhaust virtual memory.
The default value is 1000; this is a compile-time constant.
Set the scaling indicator used in warnings to si. Valid values for si are ‘u’, ‘i’, ‘c’, ‘p’, and ‘P’. At startup, it is set to ‘i’.
Make gtroff
emit a warning if the additional space inserted for
each space between words in an output line is larger or equal to
limit. A negative value is changed to zero; no argument toggles
the warning on and off without changing limit. The default
scaling indicator is ‘m’. At startup, spreadwarn
is
deactivated, and limit is set to 3m.
For example,
.spreadwarn 0.2m
causes a warning if gtroff
must add 0.2m or more for each
interword space in a line.
This request is active only if text is justified to both margins (using ‘.ad b’).
gtroff
has command-line options for printing out more warnings
(-w) and for printing backtraces (-b) when a warning
or an error occurs. The most verbose level of warnings is -ww.
Control the level of warnings checked for. The flags are the sum
of the numbers associated with each warning that is to be enabled; all
other warnings are disabled. The number associated with each warning is
listed below. For example, .warn 0
disables all warnings,
and .warn 1
disables all warnings except that about missing
glyphs. If no argument is given, all warnings are enabled.
The read-only number register .warn
contains the current warning
level.
• Warnings: |
The warnings that can be given to gtroff
are divided into the
following categories. The name associated with each warning is used by
the -w and -W options; the number is used by the
warn
request and by the .warn
register.
Non-existent glyphs.27 This is enabled by default.
Invalid numeric expressions. This is enabled by default. See Expressions.
In fill mode, lines that could not be broken so that their length was less than the line length. This is enabled by default.
Missing or mismatched closing delimiters.
Use of the el
request with no matching ie
request.
See if-else.
Meaningless scaling indicators.
Out of range arguments.
Dubious syntax in numeric expressions.
Use of di
or da
without an argument when there is no
current diversion.
Use of undefined strings, macros and diversions. When an undefined string, macro, or diversion is used, that string is automatically defined as empty. So, in most cases, at most one warning is given for each name.
Use of undefined number registers. When an undefined number register is used, that register is automatically defined to have a value of 0. So, in most cases, at most one warning is given for use of a particular name.
Use of a tab character where a number was expected.
Use of \}
where a number was expected.
Requests that are missing non-optional arguments.
Invalid input characters.
Unrecognized escape sequences. When an unrecognized escape sequence
\X
is encountered, the escape character is ignored, and
X is printed.
Missing space between a request or macro and its argument. This warning is given when an undefined name longer than two characters is encountered, and the first two characters of the name make a defined name. The request or macro is not invoked. When this warning is given, no macro is automatically defined. This is enabled by default. This warning never occurs in compatibility mode.
Non-existent fonts. This is enabled by default.
Invalid escapes in text ignored with the ig
request. These are
conditions that are errors when they do not occur in ignored text.
Color related warnings.
Missing files. The mso
request gives this warning when the
requested macro file does not exist. This is enabled by default.
All warnings except ‘di’, ‘mac’ and ‘reg’. It is intended that this covers all warnings that are useful with traditional macro packages.
All warnings.
Previous: Debugging, Up: gtroff Reference [Contents][Index]
GNU troff
has a number of features that cause incompatibilities
with documents written with old versions of troff
.
Long names cause some incompatibilities. Unix troff
interprets
.dsabcd
as defining a string ‘ab’ with contents ‘cd’. Normally, GNU
troff
interprets this as a call of a macro named dsabcd
.
Also Unix troff
interprets \*[
or \n[
as references
to a string or number register called ‘[’. In GNU troff
,
however, this is normally interpreted as the start of a long name. In
compatibility mode GNU troff
interprets long names in the
traditional way (which means that they are not recognized as names).
If n is missing or non-zero, turn on compatibility mode; otherwise, turn it off.
The read-only number register .C
is 1 if compatibility mode
is on, 0 otherwise.
Compatibility mode can be also turned on with the -C command-line option.
The do
request turns off compatibility mode while executing its
arguments as a gtroff
command. However, it does not turn off
compatibility mode while processing the macro itself. To do that, use
the de1
request (or manipulate the .C
register manually).
See Writing Macros.
.do fam T
executes the fam
request when compatibility mode is enabled.
gtroff
restores the previous compatibility setting before
interpreting any files sourced by the cmd.
Two other features are controlled by -C. If not in
compatibility mode, GNU troff
preserves the input level in
delimited arguments:
.ds xx ' \w'abc\*(xxdef'
In compatibility mode, the string ‘72def'’ is returned; without -C the resulting string is ‘168’ (assuming a TTY output device).
Finally, the escapes \f
, \H
, \m
, \M
,
\R
, \s
, and \S
are transparent for recognizing the
beginning of a line only in compatibility mode (this is a rather obscure
feature). For example, the code
.de xx Hello! .. \fB.xx\fP
prints ‘Hello!’ in bold face if in compatibility mode, and ‘.xx’ in bold face otherwise.
GNU troff
does not allow the use of the escape sequences
\|
, \^
, \&
, \{
, \}
,
\SP
, \'
, \`
, \-
, \_
, \!
,
\%
, and \c
in names of strings, macros, diversions, number
registers, fonts or environments; Unix troff
does. The \A
escape sequence (see Identifiers) may be helpful in avoiding use of
these escape sequences in names.
Fractional point sizes cause one noteworthy incompatibility. In
Unix troff
the ps
request ignores scale indicators and
thus
.ps 10u
sets the point size to 10 points, whereas in GNU troff
it
sets the point size to 10 scaled points. See Fractional Type Sizes, for more information.
In GNU troff
there is a fundamental difference between
(unformatted) input characters and (formatted) output glyphs.
Everything that affects how a glyph is output is stored with the glyph
node; once a glyph node has been constructed it is unaffected by any
subsequent requests that are executed, including bd
, cs
,
tkf
, tr
, or fp
requests. Normally glyphs are
constructed from input characters at the moment immediately before the
glyph is added to the current output line. Macros, diversions and
strings are all, in fact, the same type of object; they contain lists of
input characters and glyph nodes in any combination. A glyph node does
not behave like an input character for the purposes of macro processing;
it does not inherit any of the special properties that the input
character from which it was constructed might have had. For example,
.di x \\\\ .br .di .x
prints ‘\\’ in GNU troff
; each pair of input backslashes is
turned into one output backslash and the resulting output backslashes
are not interpreted as escape characters when they are reread.
Unix troff
would interpret them as escape characters when they
were reread and would end up printing one ‘\’. The correct way to
obtain a printable backslash is to use the \e
escape sequence:
This always prints a single instance of the current escape character,
regardless of whether or not it is used in a diversion; it also works in
both GNU troff
and Unix troff
.28 To store, for some
reason, an escape sequence in a diversion that is interpreted when the
diversion is reread, either use the traditional \!
transparent
output facility, or, if this is unsuitable, the new \?
escape
sequence.
See Diversions, and Gtroff Internals, for more information.
Next: Output Devices, Previous: gtroff Reference, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes all preprocessors that come with groff
or
which are freely available.
• geqn: | ||
• gtbl: | ||
• gpic: | ||
• ggrn: | ||
• grap: | ||
• gchem: | ||
• grefer: | ||
• gsoelim: | ||
• preconv: |
Next: gtbl, Previous: Preprocessors, Up: Preprocessors [Contents][Index]
geqn
• Invoking geqn: |
geqn
Next: gpic, Previous: geqn, Up: Preprocessors [Contents][Index]
gtbl
• Invoking gtbl: |
gtbl
Next: ggrn, Previous: gtbl, Up: Preprocessors [Contents][Index]
gpic
• Invoking gpic: |
gpic
Next: grap, Previous: gpic, Up: Preprocessors [Contents][Index]
ggrn
• Invoking ggrn: |
ggrn
Next: gchem, Previous: ggrn, Up: Preprocessors [Contents][Index]
grap
A free implementation of grap
, written by Ted Faber,
is available as an extra package from the following address:
Next: grefer, Previous: grap, Up: Preprocessors [Contents][Index]
gchem
• Invoking gchem: |
gchem
Next: gsoelim, Previous: gchem, Up: Preprocessors [Contents][Index]
grefer
• Invoking grefer: |
grefer
Next: preconv, Previous: grefer, Up: Preprocessors [Contents][Index]
gsoelim
• Invoking gsoelim: |
gsoelim
Previous: gsoelim, Up: Preprocessors [Contents][Index]
preconv
• Invoking preconv: |
preconv
Next: File formats, Previous: Preprocessors, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
• Special Characters: | ||
• grotty: | ||
• grops: | ||
• gropdf: | ||
• grodvi: | ||
• grolj4: | ||
• grolbp: | ||
• grohtml: | ||
• gxditview: |
Next: grotty, Previous: Output Devices, Up: Output Devices [Contents][Index]
See Font Files.
Next: grops, Previous: Special Characters, Up: Output Devices [Contents][Index]
grotty
The postprocessor grotty
translates the output from GNU
troff
into a form suitable for typewriter-like devices. It is
fully documented on its manual page, grotty(1).
• Invoking grotty: |
grotty
The postprocessor grotty
accepts the following command-line
options:
Do not overstrike bold glyphs. Ignored if -c isn’t used.
Do not underline bold-italic glyphs. Ignored if -c isn’t used.
Use overprint and disable colours for printing on legacy Teletype printers (see below).
Do not render lines (that is, ignore all \D
escapes).
Use form feed control characters in the output.
Put the directory dir/devname in front of the search path for the font and device description files, given the target device name.
Use horizontal tabs for sequences of 8 space characters.
Request italic glyphs from the terminal. Ignored if -c is active.
Do not overstrike.
Highlight italic glyphs. Ignored if -c is active.
Do not underline italic glyphs. Ignored if -c isn’t used.
Do not overstrike bold-italic glyphs. Ignored if -c isn’t used.
Print the version number.
The -c mode for TTY output devices means that underlining is
done by emitting sequences of ‘_’ and ‘^H’ (the backspace
character) before the actual character. Literally, this is printing
an underline character, then moving the caret back one character
position, and printing the actual character at the same position as
the underline character (similar to a typewriter). Usually, a modern
terminal can’t interpret this (and the original Teletype machines for
which this sequence was appropriate are no longer in use). You need
a pager program like less
that translates this into
ISO 6429 SGR sequences to control terminals.
Next: gropdf, Previous: grotty, Up: Output Devices [Contents][Index]
grops
The postprocessor grops
translates the output from GNU
troff
into a form suitable for Adobe POSTSCRIPT
devices. It is fully documented on its manual page, grops(1).
• Invoking grops: | ||
• Embedding PostScript: |
Next: Embedding PostScript, Previous: grops, Up: grops [Contents][Index]
grops
The postprocessor grops
accepts the following command-line
options:
Use backward compatibility settings given by flags as documented in the grops(1) manual page. Overrides the command broken in the DESC file.
Print n copies of each page.
Put the directory dir/devname in front of the search path for the font, prologue and device description files, given the target device name, usually ps.
Tell the printer to guess the page length. Useful for printing vertically centered pages when the paper dimensions are determined at print time.
Consider the directory path for searching included files specified with relative paths. The current directory is searched as fallback.
Use landscape orientation.
Use manual feed.
Set the page dimensions. Overrides the commands papersize, paperlength, and paperwidth in the DESC file. See the groff_font(5) manual page for details.
Use the prologue in the font path as the prologue instead of
the default prologue. Overrides the environment variable
GROPS_PROLOGUE
.
Set the line thickness to n/1000em. Overrides the default value n = 40.
Print the version number.
Previous: Invoking grops, Up: grops [Contents][Index]
The escape sequence
\X'ps: import file llx lly urx ury
width [height]'
places a rectangle of the specified width containing the POSTSCRIPT drawing from file file bound by the box from llx lly to urx ury (in POSTSCRIPT coordinates) at the insertion point. If height is not specified, the embedded drawing is scaled proportionally.
See Miscellaneous, for the psbb
request, which automatically
generates the bounding box.
This escape sequence is used internally by the macro PSPIC
(see the groff_tmac(5) manual page).
Next: grodvi, Previous: grops, Up: Output Devices [Contents][Index]
gropdf
The postprocessor gropdf
translates the output from GNU
troff
into a form suitable for Adobe PDF devices. It is fully
documented on its manual page, gropdf(1).
• Invoking gropdf: | ||
• Embedding PDF: |
Next: Embedding PDF, Previous: gropdf, Up: gropdf [Contents][Index]
gropdf
The postprocessor gropdf
accepts the following command-line
options:
Produce uncompressed PDFs that include debugging comments.
This forces gropdf
to embed all used fonts in the PDF,
even if they are one of the 14 base Adobe fonts.
Put the directory dir/devname in front of the search path for the font, prologue and device description files, given the target device name, usually pdf.
This forces the use of a different font foundry.
Use landscape orientation.
Set the page dimensions. Overrides the commands papersize, paperlength, and paperwidth in the DESC file. See the groff_font(5) manual page for details.
Print the version number.
Append a comment line to end of PDF showing statistics, i.e. number of pages in document. Ghostscript’s ps2pdf(1) complains about this line if it is included, but works anyway.
gropdf
normally includes a ToUnicode CMap with any font created
using text.enc as the encoding file, this makes it easier to
search for words that contain ligatures. You can include your own CMap
by specifying a filename or have no CMap at all by omitting the
filename.
Previous: Invoking gropdf, Up: gropdf [Contents][Index]
The escape sequence
\X'pdf: pdfpic file alignment width [height]
[linelength]'
places a rectangle of the specified width containing the PDF
drawing from file file of desired width and height (if
height is missing or zero then it is scaled proportionally). If
alignment is -L
the drawing is left aligned. If it is
-C
or -R
a linelength greater than the width of the
drawing is required as well. If width is specified as zero then
the width is scaled in proportion to the height.
Next: grolj4, Previous: gropdf, Up: Output Devices [Contents][Index]
grodvi
The postprocessor grodvi
translates the output from GNU
troff
into the DVI output format compatible with
the TeX document preparation system. It is fully
documented on its manual page, grodvi(1).
• Invoking grodvi: |
grodvi
The postprocessor grodvi
accepts the following command-line
options:
Do not use tpic specials to implement drawing commands.
Put the directory dir/devname in front of the search path for the font and device description files, given the target device name, usually dvi.
Use landscape orientation.
Set the page dimensions. Overrides the commands papersize, paperlength, and paperwidth in the DESC file. See groff_font(5) manual page for details.
Print the version number.
Set the line thickness to n/1000em. Overrides the default value n = 40.
Next: grolbp, Previous: grodvi, Up: Output Devices [Contents][Index]
grolj4
The postprocessor grolj4
translates the output from GNU
troff
into the PCL5 output format suitable for
printing on a HP LaserJet 4 printer. It is fully
documented on its manual page, grolj4(1).
• Invoking grolj4: |
grolj4
The postprocessor grolj4
accepts the following command-line
options:
Print n copies of each page.
Put the directory dir/devname in front of the search path for the font and device description files, given the target device name, usually lj4.
Use landscape orientation.
Set the page dimensions. Valid values for size are:
letter
, legal
, executive
, a4
,
com10
, monarch
, c5
, b5
, d1
.
Print the version number.
Set the line thickness to n/1000em. Overrides the default value n = 40.
The special drawing command \D'R dh dv'
draws a
horizontal rectangle from the current position to the position at
offset (dh,dv).
Next: grohtml, Previous: grolj4, Up: Output Devices [Contents][Index]
grolbp
The postprocessor grolbp
translates the output from GNU
troff
into the LBP output format suitable for
printing on Canon CAPSL printers. It is fully documented on
its manual page, grolbp(1).
• Invoking grolbp: |
grolbp
The postprocessor grolbp
accepts the following command-line
options:
Print n copies of each page.
Put the directory dir/devname in front of the search path for the font, prologue and device description files, given the target device name, usually lbp.
Use landscape orientation.
Use the orientation specified: portrait
or
landscape
.
Set the page dimensions. See groff_font(5) manual page for details.
Set the line thickness to n/1000em. Overrides the default value n = 40.
Print the version number.
Print command-line help.
Next: gxditview, Previous: grolbp, Up: Output Devices [Contents][Index]
grohtml
The grohtml
front end (which consists of a preprocessor,
pre-grohtml
, and a device driver, post-grohtml
) translates
the output of GNU troff
to HTML. Users should always
invoke grohtml
via the groff
command with a \-Thtml
option. If no files are given, grohtml
will read the standard
input. A filename of -
will also cause grohtml
to read
the standard input. HTML output is written to the standard
output. When grohtml
is run by groff
, options can be
passed to grohtml
using groff
’s -P option.
grohtml
invokes groff
twice. In the first pass, pictures,
equations, and tables are rendered using the ps
device, and in
the second pass HTML output is generated by the html
device.
grohtml
always writes output in UTF-8
encoding and has
built-in entities for all non-composite unicode characters. In spite of
this, groff
may issue warnings about unknown special characters
if they can’t be found during the first pass. Such warnings can be
safely ignored unless the special characters appear inside a table or
equation, in which case glyphs for these characters must be defined for
the ps
device as well.
This output device is fully documented on its manual page, grohtml(1).
• Invoking grohtml: | ||
• grohtml specific registers and strings: |
Next: grohtml specific registers and strings, Previous: grohtml, Up: grohtml [Contents][Index]
grohtml
The postprocessor grohtml
accepts the following command-line
options:
Use this number of bits (= 1, 2 or 4) for text antialiasing. Default: bits = 4.
Do not use text antialiasing.
Use white background.
Store rendered images in the directory dir.
Put the directory dir/devname in front of the search path for the font, prologue and device description files, given the target device name, usually html.
Use this number of bits (= 1, 2 or 4) for antialiasing of drawings. Default: bits = 4.
Do not use antialiasing for drawings.
Use the B
element for section headings.
Use the resolution for rendered images. Default: resolution = 100dpi.
Set the images’ stem name. Default: stem = grohtml-XXX (XXX is the process ID).
Place each section in a separate file called stem-n.html (where n is a generated section number).
Do not generate the table of contents.
Generate simple fragment identifiers.
Use vertical padding offset for images.
Display the page rendering progress to stderr
.
Do not use horizontal rules to separate headers and footers.
Set the base font size, to be modified using the elements BIG
and SMALL
.
Generate separate files for sections at level level.
Print the version number.
Generate a validator button at the bottom.
Generate a signature of groff after the validator button, if any.
Previous: Invoking grohtml, Up: grohtml [Contents][Index]
grohtml
specific registers and stringsThe registers ps4html
and www-image-template
are defined
by the pre-grohtml
preprocessor. pre-grohtml
reads in the
troff
input, marks up the inline equations and passes the result
firstly to
troff -Tps -rps4html=1 -dwww-image-template=template
and secondly to
troff -Thtml
or
troff -Txhtml
The POSTSCRIPT device is used to create all the image files (for
-Thtml; if -Txhtml is used, all equations are passed
to geqn
to produce MathML, and the register
ps4html
enables the macro sets to ignore floating keeps, footers,
and headings.
The register www-image-template
is set to the user specified
template name or the default name.
Previous: grohtml, Up: Output Devices [Contents][Index]
gxditview
• Invoking gxditview: |
gxditview
Next: Installation, Previous: Output Devices, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
All files read and written by gtroff
are text files. The
following two sections describe their format.
• gtroff Output: | ||
• Font Files: |
Next: Font Files, Previous: File formats, Up: File formats [Contents][Index]
gtroff
OutputThis section describes the intermediate output format of GNU
troff
. This output is produced by a run of gtroff
before
it is fed into a device postprocessor program.
As groff
is a wrapper program around gtroff
that
automatically calls a postprocessor, this output does not show up
normally. This is why it is called intermediate. groff
provides the option -Z to inhibit postprocessing, such that the
produced intermediate output is sent to standard output just like
calling gtroff
manually.
Here, the term troff output describes what is output by
gtroff
, while intermediate output refers to the language
that is accepted by the parser that prepares this output for the
postprocessors. This parser is smarter on whitespace and implements
obsolete elements for compatibility, otherwise both formats are the
same.29
The main purpose of the intermediate output concept is to facilitate the
development of postprocessors by providing a common programming
interface for all devices. It has a language of its own that is
completely different from the gtroff
language. While the
gtroff
language is a high-level programming language for text
processing, the intermediate output language is a kind of low-level
assembler language by specifying all positions on the page for writing
and drawing.
The intermediate output produced by gtroff
is fairly readable,
while output from AT&T troff
is rather hard to
understand because of strange habits that are still supported, but not
used any longer by gtroff
.
• Language Concepts: | ||
• Command Reference: | ||
• Intermediate Output Examples: | ||
• Output Language Compatibility: |
Next: Command Reference, Previous: gtroff Output, Up: gtroff Output [Contents][Index]
During the run of gtroff
, the input data is cracked down to the
information on what has to be printed at what position on the intended
device. So the language of the intermediate output format can be quite
small. Its only elements are commands with and without arguments. In
this section, the term command always refers to the intermediate
output language, and never to the gtroff
language used for
document formatting. There are commands for positioning and text
writing, for drawing, and for device controlling.
• Separation: | ||
• Argument Units: | ||
• Document Parts: |
Next: Argument Units, Previous: Language Concepts, Up: Language Concepts [Contents][Index]
AT&T troff
output has strange requirements on
whitespace. The gtroff
output parser, however, is smart about
whitespace by making it maximally optional. The whitespace characters,
i.e., the tab, space, and newline characters, always have a syntactical
meaning. They are never printable because spacing within the output is
always done by positioning commands.
Any sequence of space or tab characters is treated as a single syntactical space. It separates commands and arguments, but is only required when there would occur a clashing between the command code and the arguments without the space. Most often, this happens when variable-length command names, arguments, argument lists, or command clusters meet. Commands and arguments with a known, fixed length need not be separated by syntactical space.
A line break is a syntactical element, too. Every command argument can be followed by whitespace, a comment, or a newline character. Thus a syntactical line break is defined to consist of optional syntactical space that is optionally followed by a comment, and a newline character.
The normal commands, those for positioning and text, consist of a single
letter taking a fixed number of arguments. For historical reasons, the
parser allows stacking of such commands on the same line, but
fortunately, in gtroff
’s intermediate output, every command with
at least one argument is followed by a line break, thus providing
excellent readability.
The other commands – those for drawing and device controlling – have a more complicated structure; some recognize long command names, and some take a variable number of arguments. So all ‘D’ and ‘x’ commands were designed to request a syntactical line break after their last argument. Only one command, ‘x X’, has an argument that can stretch over several lines; all other commands must have all of their arguments on the same line as the command, i.e., the arguments may not be split by a line break.
Empty lines (these are lines containing only space and/or a comment), can occur everywhere. They are just ignored.
Next: Document Parts, Previous: Separation, Up: Language Concepts [Contents][Index]
Some commands take integer arguments that are assumed to represent values in a measurement unit, but the letter for the corresponding scale indicator is not written with the output command arguments. Most commands assume the scale indicator ‘u’, the basic unit of the device, some use ‘z’, the scaled point unit of the device, while others, such as the color commands, expect plain integers.
Note that single characters can have the eighth bit set, as can the names of fonts and special characters. The names of characters and fonts can be of arbitrary length. A character that is to be printed is always in the current font.
A string argument is always terminated by the next whitespace character (space, tab, or newline); an embedded ‘#’ character is regarded as part of the argument, not as the beginning of a comment command. An integer argument is already terminated by the next non-digit character, which then is regarded as the first character of the next argument or command.
Previous: Argument Units, Up: Language Concepts [Contents][Index]
A correct intermediate output document consists of two parts, the prologue and the body.
The task of the prologue is to set the general device parameters using
three exactly specified commands. gtroff
’s prologue is
guaranteed to consist of the following three lines (in that order):
x T device x res n h v x init
with the arguments set as outlined in Device Control Commands. Note that the parser for the intermediate output format is able to swallow additional whitespace and comments as well even in the prologue.
The body is the main section for processing the document data.
Syntactically, it is a sequence of any commands different from the ones
used in the prologue. Processing is terminated as soon as the first
‘x stop’ command is encountered; the last line of any
gtroff
intermediate output always contains such a command.
Semantically, the body is page oriented. A new page is started by a ‘p’ command. Positioning, writing, and drawing commands are always done within the current page, so they cannot occur before the first ‘p’ command. Absolute positioning (by the ‘H’ and ‘V’ commands) is done relative to the current page; all other positioning is done relative to the current location within this page.
Next: Intermediate Output Examples, Previous: Language Concepts, Up: gtroff Output [Contents][Index]
This section describes all intermediate output commands, both from
AT&T troff
as well as the gtroff
extensions.
• Comment Command: | ||
• Simple Commands: | ||
• Graphics Commands: | ||
• Device Control Commands: | ||
• Obsolete Command: |
Next: Simple Commands, Previous: Command Reference, Up: Command Reference [Contents][Index]
#anything<end of line>
A comment. Ignore any characters from the ‘#’ character up to the next newline character.
This command is the only possibility for commenting in the intermediate output. Each comment can be preceded by arbitrary syntactical space; every command can be terminated by a comment.
Next: Graphics Commands, Previous: Comment Command, Up: Command Reference [Contents][Index]
The commands in this subsection have a command code consisting of a single character, taking a fixed number of arguments. Most of them are commands for positioning and text writing. These commands are smart about whitespace. Optionally, syntactical space can be inserted before, after, and between the command letter and its arguments. All of these commands are stackable, i.e., they can be preceded by other simple commands or followed by arbitrary other commands on the same line. A separating syntactical space is only necessary when two integer arguments would clash or if the preceding argument ends with a string argument.
C xxx<whitespace>
Print a special character named xxx. The trailing syntactical space or line break is necessary to allow glyph names of arbitrary length. The glyph is printed at the current print position; the glyph’s size is read from the font file. The print position is not changed.
c g
Print glyph g at the current print position;30 the glyph’s size is read from the font file. The print position is not changed.
f n
Set font to font number n (a non-negative integer).
H n
Move right to the absolute vertical position n (a non-negative integer in basic units ‘u’ relative to left edge of current page.
h n
Move n (a non-negative integer) basic units ‘u’ horizontally
to the right. The original Unix troff manual allows negative
values for n also, but gtroff
doesn’t use this.
m color-scheme [component …]
Set the color for text (glyphs), line drawing, and the outline of
graphic objects using different color schemes; the analogous command
for the filling color of graphic objects is ‘DF’. The color
components are specified as integer arguments between 0 and 65536. The
number of color components and their meaning vary for the different
color schemes. These commands are generated by gtroff
’s escape
sequence \m
. No position changing. These commands are a
gtroff
extension.
mc cyan magenta yellow
Set color using the CMY color scheme, having the 3 color components cyan, magenta, and yellow.
md
Set color to the default color value (black in most cases). No component arguments.
mg gray
Set color to the shade of gray given by the argument, an integer between 0 (black) and 65536 (white).
mk cyan magenta yellow black
Set color using the CMYK color scheme, having the 4 color components cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
mr red green blue
Set color using the RGB color scheme, having the 3 color components red, green, and blue.
N n
Print glyph with index n (a non-negative integer) of the
current font. This command is a gtroff
extension.
n b a
Inform the device about a line break, but no positioning is done by this
command. In AT&T troff
, the integer arguments b
and a informed about the space before and after the current
line to make the intermediate output more human readable without
performing any action. In groff
, they are just ignored, but they
must be provided for compatibility reasons.
p n
Begin a new page in the outprint. The page number is set to n. This page is completely independent of pages formerly processed even if those have the same page number. The vertical position on the outprint is automatically set to 0. All positioning, writing, and drawing is always done relative to a page, so a ‘p’ command must be issued before any of these commands.
s n
Set point size to n scaled points (this is unit ‘z’).
AT&T troff
used the unit points (‘p’) instead.
See Output Language Compatibility.
t xxx<whitespace>
t xxx dummy-arg<whitespace>
Print a word, i.e., a sequence of characters xxx representing
output glyphs which names are single characters, terminated by a space
character or a line break; an optional second integer argument is
ignored (this allows the formatter to generate an even number of
arguments). The first glyph should be printed at the current position,
the current horizontal position should then be increased by the width of
the first glyph, and so on for each glyph. The widths of the glyphs are
read from the font file, scaled for the current point size, and rounded
to a multiple of the horizontal resolution. Special characters cannot
be printed using this command (use the ‘C’ command for special
characters). This command is a gtroff
extension; it is only used
for devices whose DESC file contains the tcommand
keyword
(see DESC File Format).
u n xxx<whitespace>
Print word with track kerning. This is the same as the ‘t’ command
except that after printing each glyph, the current horizontal position
is increased by the sum of the width of that glyph and n (an
integer in basic units ‘u’). This command is a gtroff
extension; it is only used for devices whose DESC file contains
the tcommand
keyword (see DESC File Format).
V n
Move down to the absolute vertical position n (a non-negative integer in basic units ‘u’) relative to upper edge of current page.
v n
Move n basic units ‘u’ down (n is a non-negative
integer). The original Unix troff manual allows negative values for
n also, but gtroff
doesn’t use this.
w
Informs about a paddable white space to increase readability. The spacing itself must be performed explicitly by a move command.
Next: Device Control Commands, Previous: Simple Commands, Up: Command Reference [Contents][Index]
Each graphics or drawing command in the intermediate output starts with the letter ‘D’, followed by one or two characters that specify a subcommand; this is followed by a fixed or variable number of integer arguments that are separated by a single space character. A ‘D’ command may not be followed by another command on the same line (apart from a comment), so each ‘D’ command is terminated by a syntactical line break.
gtroff
output follows the classical spacing rules (no space
between command and subcommand, all arguments are preceded by a single
space character), but the parser allows optional space between the
command letters and makes the space before the first argument optional.
As usual, each space can be any sequence of tab and space characters.
Some graphics commands can take a variable number of arguments. In this case, they are integers representing a size measured in basic units ‘u’. The arguments called h1, h2, …, hn stand for horizontal distances where positive means right, negative left. The arguments called v1, v2, …, vn stand for vertical distances where positive means down, negative up. All these distances are offsets relative to the current location.
Each graphics command directly corresponds to a similar gtroff
\D
escape sequence. See Drawing Requests.
Unknown ‘D’ commands are assumed to be device-specific. Its arguments are parsed as strings; the whole information is then sent to the postprocessor.
In the following command reference, the syntax element <line break> means a syntactical line break as defined above.
D~ h1 v1 h2 v2 … hn vn<line break>
Draw B-spline from current position to offset (h1,v1), then to offset (h2,v2), if given, etc. up to (hn,vn). This command takes a variable number of argument pairs; the current position is moved to the terminal point of the drawn curve.
Da h1 v1 h2 v2<line break>
Draw arc from current position to (h1,v1)+(h2,v2) with center at (h1,v1); then move the current position to the final point of the arc.
DC d<line break>
DC d dummy-arg<line break>
Draw a solid circle using the current fill color with
diameter d (integer in basic units ‘u’) with leftmost
point at the current position; then move the current position to the
rightmost point of the circle. An optional second integer argument is
ignored (this allows the formatter to generate an even number of
arguments). This command is a gtroff
extension.
Dc d<line break>
Draw circle line with diameter d (integer in basic units ‘u’) with leftmost point at the current position; then move the current position to the rightmost point of the circle.
DE h v<line break>
Draw a solid ellipse in the current fill color with a horizontal
diameter of h and a vertical diameter of v (both
integers in basic units ‘u’) with the leftmost point at the current
position; then move to the rightmost point of the ellipse. This command
is a gtroff
extension.
De h v<line break>
Draw an outlined ellipse with a horizontal diameter of h and a vertical diameter of v (both integers in basic units ‘u’) with the leftmost point at current position; then move to the rightmost point of the ellipse.
DF color-scheme [component …]<line break>
Set fill color for solid drawing objects using different color schemes;
the analogous command for setting the color of text, line graphics, and
the outline of graphic objects is ‘m’. The color components are
specified as integer arguments between 0 and 65536. The number of color
components and their meaning vary for the different color schemes.
These commands are generated by gtroff
’s escape sequences
\D'F …'
and \M
(with no other corresponding
graphics commands). No position changing. This command is a
gtroff
extension.
DFc cyan magenta yellow<line break>
Set fill color for solid drawing objects using the CMY color scheme, having the 3 color components cyan, magenta, and yellow.
DFd<line break>
Set fill color for solid drawing objects to the default fill color value (black in most cases). No component arguments.
DFg gray<line break>
Set fill color for solid drawing objects to the shade of gray given by the argument, an integer between 0 (black) and 65536 (white).
DFk cyan magenta yellow black<line break>
Set fill color for solid drawing objects using the CMYK color scheme, having the 4 color components cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
DFr red green blue<line break>
Set fill color for solid drawing objects using the RGB color scheme, having the 3 color components red, green, and blue.
Df n<line break>
The argument n must be an integer in the range -32767 to 32767.
Set the color for filling solid drawing objects to a shade of gray, where 0 corresponds to solid white, 1000 (the default) to solid black, and values in between to intermediate shades of gray; this is obsoleted by command ‘DFg’.
Set the filling color to the color that is currently being used for the text and the outline, see command ‘m’. For example, the command sequence
mg 0 0 65536 Df -1
sets all colors to blue.
No position changing. This command is a gtroff
extension.
Dl h v<line break>
Draw line from current position to offset (h,v) (integers in basic units ‘u’); then set current position to the end of the drawn line.
Dp h1 v1 h2 v2 … hn vn<line break>
Draw a polygon line from current position to offset (h1,v1),
from there to offset (h2,v2), etc. up to offset
(hn,vn), and from there back to the starting position. For
historical reasons, the position is changed by adding the sum of all
arguments with odd index to the actual horizontal position and the even
ones to the vertical position. Although this doesn’t make sense it is
kept for compatibility.
This command is a gtroff
extension.
DP h1 v1 h2 v2 … hn vn<line break>
Draw a solid polygon in the current fill color rather than an outlined
polygon, using the same arguments and positioning as the corresponding
‘Dp’ command.
This command is a gtroff
extension.
Dt n<line break>
Set the current line thickness to n (an integer in basic
units ‘u’) if n>0; if n=0 select the
smallest available line thickness; if n<0 set the line
thickness proportional to the point size (this is the default before the
first ‘Dt’ command was specified). For historical reasons, the
horizontal position is changed by adding the argument to the actual
horizontal position, while the vertical position is not changed.
Although this doesn’t make sense it is kept for compatibility.
This command is a gtroff
extension.
Next: Obsolete Command, Previous: Graphics Commands, Up: Command Reference [Contents][Index]
Each device control command starts with the letter ‘x’, followed by
a space character (optional or arbitrary space or tab in gtroff
)
and a subcommand letter or word; each argument (if any) must be preceded
by a syntactical space. All ‘x’ commands are terminated by a
syntactical line break; no device control command can be followed by
another command on the same line (except a comment).
The subcommand is basically a single letter, but to increase
readability, it can be written as a word, i.e., an arbitrary sequence of
characters terminated by the next tab, space, or newline character. All
characters of the subcommand word but the first are simply ignored. For
example, gtroff
outputs the initialization command ‘x i’
as ‘x init’ and the resolution command ‘x r’ as
‘x res’.
In the following, the syntax element <line break> means a syntactical line break (see Separation).
xF name<line break>
The ‘F’ stands for Filename.
Use name as the intended name for the current file in error
reports. This is useful for remembering the original file name when
gtroff
uses an internal piping mechanism. The input file is not
changed by this command. This command is a gtroff
extension.
xf n s<line break>
The ‘f’ stands for font.
Mount font position n (a non-negative integer) with font named s (a text word). See Font Positions.
xH n<line break>
The ‘H’ stands for Height.
Set glyph height to n (a positive integer in scaled points
‘z’). AT&T troff
uses the unit points (‘p’)
instead. See Output Language Compatibility.
xi<line break>
The ‘i’ stands for init.
Initialize device. This is the third command of the prologue.
xp<line break>
The ‘p’ stands for pause.
Parsed but ignored. The original Unix troff manual writes
pause device, can be restarted
xr n h v<line break>
The ‘r’ stands for resolution.
Resolution is n, while h is the minimal horizontal motion, and v the minimal vertical motion possible with this device; all arguments are positive integers in basic units ‘u’ per inch. This is the second command of the prologue.
xS n<line break>
The ‘S’ stands for Slant.
Set slant to n (an integer in basic units ‘u’).
xs<line break>
The ‘s’ stands for stop.
Terminates the processing of the current file; issued as the last command of any intermediate troff output.
xt<line break>
The ‘t’ stands for trailer.
Generate trailer information, if any. In gtroff, this is actually just ignored.
xT xxx<line break>
The ‘T’ stands for Typesetter.
Set name of device to word xxx, a sequence of characters ended by
the next white space character. The possible device names coincide with
those from the groff
-T option. This is the first
command of the prologue.
xu n<line break>
The ‘u’ stands for underline.
Configure underlining of spaces. If n is 1, start
underlining of spaces; if n is 0, stop underlining of spaces.
This is needed for the cu
request in nroff mode and is ignored
otherwise. This command is a gtroff
extension.
xX anything<line break>
The ‘x’ stands for X-escape.
Send string anything uninterpreted to the device. If the line
following this command starts with a ‘+’ character this line is
interpreted as a continuation line in the following sense. The ‘+’
is ignored, but a newline character is sent instead to the device, the
rest of the line is sent uninterpreted. The same applies to all
following lines until the first character of a line is not a ‘+’
character. This command is generated by the gtroff
escape
sequence \X
. The line-continuing feature is a gtroff
extension.
Previous: Device Control Commands, Up: Command Reference [Contents][Index]
In AT&T troff
output, the writing of a single glyph is
mostly done by a very strange command that combines a horizontal move
and a single character giving the glyph name. It doesn’t have a command
code, but is represented by a 3-character argument consisting of exactly
2 digits and a character.
Move right dd (exactly two decimal digits) basic units ‘u’, then print glyph g (represented as a single character).
In gtroff
, arbitrary syntactical space around and within this
command is allowed to be added. Only when a preceding command on the
same line ends with an argument of variable length a separating space is
obligatory. In AT&T troff
, large clusters of these and
other commands are used, mostly without spaces; this made such output
almost unreadable.
For modern high-resolution devices, this command does not make sense
because the width of the glyphs can become much larger than two decimal
digits. In gtroff
, this is only used for the devices X75
,
X75-12
, X100
, and X100-12
. For other devices, the
commands ‘t’ and ‘u’ provide a better functionality.
Next: Output Language Compatibility, Previous: Command Reference, Up: gtroff Output [Contents][Index]
This section presents the intermediate output generated from the same
input for three different devices. The input is the sentence ‘hell
world’ fed into gtroff
on the command line.
ps
This is the standard output of gtroff
if no -T option is
given.
shell> echo "hell world" | groff -Z -T ps x T ps x res 72000 1 1 x init
p1 x font 5 TR f5 s10000 V12000 H72000 thell wh2500 tw H96620 torld n12000 0
x trailer V792000 x stop
This output can be fed into grops
to get its representation as a
POSTSCRIPT file.
latin1
This is similar to the high-resolution device except that the positioning is done at a minor scale. Some comments (lines starting with ‘#’) were added for clarification; they were not generated by the formatter.
shell> echo "hell world" | groff -Z -T latin1 # prologue x T latin1 x res 240 24 40 x init
# begin a new page p1 # font setup x font 1 R f1 s10 # initial positioning on the page V40 H0 # write text `hell' thell # inform about space, and issue a horizontal jump wh24 # write text `world' tworld # announce line break, but do nothing because ... n40 0
# ... the end of the document has been reached x trailer V2640 x stop
This output can be fed into grotty
to get a formatted text
document.
troff
outputSince a computer monitor has a very low resolution compared to modern printers the intermediate output for the X Window devices can use the jump-and-write command with its 2-digit displacements.
shell> echo "hell world" | groff -Z -T X100 x T X100 x res 100 1 1 x init
p1 x font 5 TR f5 s10 V16 H100 # write text with jump-and-write commands ch07e07l03lw06w11o07r05l03dh7 n16 0
x trailer V1100 x stop
This output can be fed into xditview
or gxditview
for
displaying in X.
Due to the obsolete jump-and-write command, the text clusters in the
AT&T troff
output are almost unreadable.
Previous: Intermediate Output Examples, Up: gtroff Output [Contents][Index]
The intermediate output language of AT&T troff
was
first documented in the Unix troff manual, with later additions
documented in A Typesetter-independent TROFF, written by Brian
Kernighan.
The gtroff
intermediate output format is compatible with this
specification except for the following features.
groff
devices are also fundamentally different from the ones
in AT&T troff
. For example, the AT&T
POSTSCRIPT device is called post
and has a resolution of
only 720 units per inch, suitable for printers 20 years ago, while
groff
’s ps
device has a resolution of 72000 units per
inch. Maybe, by implementing some rescaling mechanism similar to the
classical quasi device independence, groff
could emulate
AT&T’s post
device.
gtroff
, while
AT&T troff
has point (‘p’). This isn’t an
incompatibility but a compatible extension, for both units coincide for
all devices without a sizescale
parameter in the DESC
file, including all postprocessors from AT&T and
groff
’s text devices. The few groff
devices with a
sizescale
parameter either do not exist for AT&T
troff
, have a different name, or seem to have a different
resolution. So conflicts are very unlikely.
gtroff
used this
feature it is kept for compatibility reasons.
Previous: gtroff Output, Up: File formats [Contents][Index]
The gtroff
font format is roughly a superset of the
ditroff
font format (as used in later versions of AT&T
troff
and its descendants). Unlike the ditroff
font
format, there is no associated binary format; all files are text
files.31 The font files for device name are stored in a directory
devname. There are two types of file: a device description
file called DESC and for each font f a font file
called f.
• DESC File Format: | ||
• Font File Format: |
Next: Font File Format, Previous: Font Files, Up: Font Files [Contents][Index]
The DESC file can contain the following types of line. Except
for the charset
keyword, which must come last (if at all), the
order of the lines is not important. Later entries in the file,
however, override previous values.
charset
This line and everything following in the file are ignored. It is allowed for the sake of backwards compatibility.
family fam
The default font family is fam.
fonts n F1 F2 F3 … Fn
Fonts F1 … Fn are mounted in the font positions m+1, …, m+n where m is the number of styles. This command may extend over more than one line. A font name of 0 means no font is mounted on the corresponding font position.
hor n
The horizontal resolution is n machine units. All horizontal quantities are rounded to be multiples of this value.
image_generator string
Needed for grohtml
only. It specifies the program to generate
PNG images from POSTSCRIPT input. Under GNU/Linux this is
usually gs
but under other systems (notably cygwin) it might
be set to another name.
paperlength n
The physical vertical dimension of the output medium in machine units.
This isn’t used by troff
itself but by output devices.
Deprecated. Use papersize
instead.
papersize string …
Select a paper size. Valid values for string are the ISO paper
types A0
–A7
, B0
–B7
, C0
–C7
,
D0
–D7
, DL
, and the US paper types letter
,
legal
, tabloid
, ledger
, statement
,
executive
, com10
, and monarch
. Case is not
significant for string if it holds predefined paper types.
Alternatively, string can be a file name (e.g.
/etc/papersize); if the file can be opened, groff
reads
the first line and tests for the above paper sizes. Finally,
string can be a custom paper size in the format
length,width
(no spaces before and after the comma).
Both length and width must have a unit appended; valid
values are ‘i’ for inches, ‘c’ for centimeters, ‘p’ for
points, and ‘P’ for picas. Example: 12c,235p
. An argument
that starts with a digit is always treated as a custom paper format.
papersize
sets both the vertical and horizontal dimension of the
output medium.
More than one argument can be specified; groff
scans from left to
right and uses the first valid paper specification.
paperwidth n
The physical horizontal dimension of the output medium in machine units.
This isn’t used by troff
itself but by output devices.
Deprecated. Use papersize
instead.
pass_filenames
Tell gtroff
to emit the name of the source file currently being
processed. This is achieved by the intermediate output command
‘F’. Currently, this is only used by the grohtml
output
device.
postpro program
Call program as a postprocessor. For example, the line
postpro grodvi
in the file devdvi/DESC makes groff
call grodvi
if
option -Tdvi is given (and -Z isn’t used).
prepro program
Call program as a preprocessor. Currently, this keyword is used
by groff
with option -Thtml or -Txhtml only.
print program
Use program as a spooler program for printing. If omitted, the
-l and -L options of groff
are ignored.
res n
There are n machine units per inch.
sizes s1 s2 … sn 0
This means that the device has fonts at s1, s2, … sn scaled points. The list of sizes must be terminated by 0 (this is digit zero). Each si can also be a range of sizes m–n. The list can extend over more than one line.
sizescale n
The scale factor for point sizes. By default this has a value
of 1. One scaled point is equal to one point/n. The
arguments to the unitwidth
and sizes
commands are given in
scaled points. See Fractional Type Sizes, for more information.
styles S1 S2 … Sm
The first m font positions are associated with styles S1 … Sm.
tcommand
This means that the postprocessor can handle the ‘t’ and ‘u’ intermediate output commands.
unicode
Indicate that the output device supports the complete Unicode repertoire. Useful only for devices that produce character entities instead of glyphs.
If unicode
is present, no charset
section is required in
the font description files since the Unicode handling built into
groff
is used. However, if there are entries in a charset
section, they either override the default mappings for those particular
characters or add new mappings (normally for composite characters).
This is used for -Tutf8, -Thtml, and -Txhtml.
unitwidth n
Quantities in the font files are given in machine units for fonts whose point size is n scaled points.
unscaled_charwidths
Make the font handling module always return unscaled character widths.
Needed for the grohtml
device.
use_charnames_in_special
This command indicates that gtroff
should encode special
characters inside special commands. Currently, this is only used by the
grohtml
output device. See Postprocessor Access.
vert n
The vertical resolution is n machine units. All vertical quantities are rounded to be multiples of this value.
The res
, unitwidth
, fonts
, and sizes
lines
are mandatory. Other commands are ignored by gtroff
but may be
used by postprocessors to store arbitrary information about the device
in the DESC file.
Here a list of obsolete keywords that are recognized by groff
but completely ignored: spare1
, spare2
,
biggestfont
.
Previous: DESC File Format, Up: Font Files [Contents][Index]
A font file, also (and probably better) called a font description file, has two sections. The first section is a sequence of lines each containing a sequence of blank delimited words; the first word in the line is a key, and subsequent words give a value for that key.
name f
The name of the font is f.
spacewidth n
The normal width of a space is n.
slant n
The glyphs of the font have a slant of n degrees. (Positive means forward.)
ligatures lig1 lig2 … lign [0]
Glyphs lig1, lig2, …, lign are ligatures; possible ligatures are ‘ff’, ‘fi’, ‘fl’, ‘ffi’ and ‘ffl’. For backwards compatibility, the list of ligatures may be terminated with a 0. The list of ligatures may not extend over more than one line.
special
The font is special; this means that when a glyph is requested that is not present in the current font, it is searched for in any special fonts that are mounted.
Other commands are ignored by gtroff
but may be used by
postprocessors to store arbitrary information about the font in the font
file.
The first section can contain comments, which start with the ‘#’ character and extend to the end of a line.
The second section contains one or two subsections. It must contain a
charset
subsection and it may also contain a kernpairs
subsection. These subsections can appear in any order. Each subsection
starts with a word on a line by itself.
The word charset
starts the character set
subsection.32 The charset
line is followed by
a sequence of lines. Each line gives information for one glyph. A line
comprises a number of fields separated by blanks or tabs. The format is
name metrics type code [entity-name] [
--
comment]
name identifies the glyph name33: If
name is a single character c then it corresponds to the
gtroff
input character c; if it is of the form
‘\c’ where c is a single character, then it corresponds
to the special character \[c]
; otherwise it corresponds to
the special character ‘\[name]’. If it is exactly two
characters xx it can be entered as ‘\(xx’. Note that
single-letter special characters can’t be accessed as ‘\c’;
the only exception is ‘\-’, which is identical to \[-]
.
gtroff
supports 8-bit input characters; however some utilities
have difficulties with eight-bit characters. For this reason, there is
a convention that the entity name ‘charn’ is equivalent to
the single input character whose code is n. For example,
‘char163’ would be equivalent to the character with code 163,
which is the pounds sterling sign in the ISO Latin-1 character
set. You shouldn’t use ‘charn’ entities in font description
files since they are related to input, not output. Otherwise, you get
hard-coded connections between input and output encoding, which prevents
use of different (input) character sets.
The name ‘---’ is special and indicates that the glyph is unnamed;
such glyphs can only be used by means of the \N
escape sequence
in gtroff
.
The type field gives the glyph type:
1
the glyph has a descender, for example, ‘p’;
2
the glyph has an ascender, for example, ‘b’;
3
the glyph has both an ascender and a descender, for example, ‘(’.
The code field gives the code that the postprocessor uses to
print the glyph. The glyph can also be input to gtroff
using
this code by means of the \N
escape sequence. code can be
any integer. If it starts with ‘0’ it is interpreted as octal; if
it starts with ‘0x’ or ‘0X’ it is interpreted as hexadecimal.
Note, however, that the \N
escape sequence only accepts a decimal
integer.
The entity-name field gives an ASCII string identifying
the glyph that the postprocessor uses to print the gtroff
glyph
name. This field is optional and has been introduced so that the
grohtml
device driver can encode its character set. For example,
the glyph ‘\[Po]’ is represented as ‘£’ in
HTML 4.0.
Anything on the line after the entity-name field resp. after ‘--’ is ignored.
The metrics field has the form:
width[,
height[,
depth[,
italic-correction [,
left-italic-correction[,
subscript-correction]]]]]
There must not be any spaces between these subfields (it has been split
here into two lines for better legibility only). Missing subfields are
assumed to be 0. The subfields are all decimal integers. Since
there is no associated binary format, these values are not required to
fit into a variable of type ‘char’ as they are in ditroff
.
The width subfield gives the width of the glyph. The height
subfield gives the height of the glyph (upwards is positive); if a glyph
does not extend above the baseline, it should be given a zero height,
rather than a negative height. The depth subfield gives the depth
of the glyph, that is, the distance from the baseline to the lowest
point below the baseline to which the glyph extends (downwards is
positive); if a glyph does not extend below the baseline, it should be
given a zero depth, rather than a negative depth. The
italic-correction subfield gives the amount of space that should
be added after the glyph when it is immediately to be followed by a
glyph from a roman font. The left-italic-correction subfield
gives the amount of space that should be added before the glyph when it
is immediately to be preceded by a glyph from a roman font. The
subscript-correction gives the amount of space that should be
added after a glyph before adding a subscript. This should be less than
the italic correction.
A line in the charset
section can also have the format
name "
This indicates that name is just another name for the glyph mentioned in the preceding line.
The word kernpairs
starts the kernpairs section. This contains a
sequence of lines of the form:
c1 c2 n
This means that when glyph c1 appears next to glyph c2 the space between them should be increased by n. Most entries in the kernpairs section have a negative value for n.
Next: Copying This Manual, Previous: File formats, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Next: Request Index, Previous: Installation, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Copyright © 2000-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.
A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public.
A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
“Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
“CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization.
“Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in part, as part of another Document.
An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this License, and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (C) year your name. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with…Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts being list.
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.
Next: Escape Index, Previous: Copying This Manual, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Requests appear without the leading control character (normally either ‘.’ or ‘'’).
Jump to: | A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P R S T U V W |
---|
Jump to: | A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P R S T U V W |
---|
Next: Operator Index, Previous: Request Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Any escape sequence \X
with X not in the list below
emits a warning, printing glyph X.
Jump to: | \ |
---|
Jump to: | \ |
---|
Next: Register Index, Previous: Escape Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | ! % & ( ) * + - / : < = > |
---|
Index Entry | Section | ||
---|---|---|---|
| |||
! | |||
! : | Expressions | ||
| |||
% | |||
% : | Expressions | ||
| |||
& | |||
& : | Expressions | ||
| |||
( | |||
( : | Expressions | ||
| |||
) | |||
) : | Expressions | ||
| |||
* | |||
* : | Expressions | ||
| |||
+ | |||
+ : | Expressions | ||
+ : | Expressions | ||
| |||
- | |||
- : | Expressions | ||
- : | Expressions | ||
| |||
/ | |||
/ : | Expressions | ||
| |||
: | |||
: : | Expressions | ||
| |||
< | |||
< : | Expressions | ||
<= : | Expressions | ||
<? : | Expressions | ||
| |||
= | |||
= : | Expressions | ||
== : | Expressions | ||
| |||
> | |||
> : | Expressions | ||
>= : | Expressions | ||
>? : | Expressions | ||
|
Jump to: | ! % & ( ) * + - / : < = > |
---|
Next: Macro Index, Previous: Operator Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
The macro package or program a specific register belongs to is appended in brackets.
A register name x
consisting of exactly one character can be
accessed as ‘\nx’. A register name xx
consisting of exactly
two characters can be accessed as ‘\n(xx’. Register names
xxx
of any length can be accessed as ‘\n[xxx]’.
Jump to: | $
%
.
C D F G H L M N O P Q R S U V Y |
---|
Jump to: | $
%
.
C D F G H L M N O P Q R S U V Y |
---|
Next: String Index, Previous: Register Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
The macro package a specific macro belongs to is appended in brackets. They appear without the leading control character (normally ‘.’).
Jump to: | 1
2
[
]
A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T U V X |
---|
Jump to: | 1
2
[
]
A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T U V X |
---|
Next: Glyph Name Index, Previous: Macro Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
The macro package or program a specific string belongs to is appended in brackets.
A string name x
consisting of exactly one character can be
accessed as ‘\*x’. A string name xx
consisting of exactly
two characters can be accessed as ‘\*(xx’. String names xxx
of any length can be accessed as ‘\*[xxx]’.
Jump to: | !
'
*
,
-
.
3
8
:
?
^
_
`
{
}
~
A C D H L M O Q R S T U V W |
---|
Jump to: | !
'
*
,
-
.
3
8
:
?
^
_
`
{
}
~
A C D H L M O Q R S T U V W |
---|
Next: Font File Keyword Index, Previous: String Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
A glyph name xx
consisting of exactly two characters can be
accessed as ‘\(xx’. Glyph names xxx
of any length can be
accessed as ‘\[xxx]’.
Next: Program and File Index, Previous: Glyph Name Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | #
-
B C F H I K L N P R S T U V |
---|
Jump to: | #
-
B C F H I K L N P R S T U V |
---|
Next: Concept Index, Previous: Font File Keyword Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | A C D E F G H L M N P R S T |
---|
Jump to: | A C D E F G H L M N P R S T |
---|
Previous: Program and File Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | "
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
8
:
<
=
>
[
\
]
|
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Y Z |
---|
Jump to: | "
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
8
:
<
=
>
[
\
]
|
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Y Z |
---|
What You See Is What You Get
Jerome H. Saltzer, a grad student then, later a
Professor of Electrical Engineering, now retired. Saltzer’s PhD thesis
was the first application for RUNOFF
and is available from the
MIT Libraries.
The same is true for the other main macro packages that
come with groff
: man, mdoc, ms, mm,
and mandoc. This won’t work in general; for example, to load
trace.tmac, either ‘-mtrace’ or ‘-m trace’ must be
used.
This section is derived from Writing Papers with nroff using -me by Eric P. Allman.
If you need finer granularity of the vertical
space, use the pvs
request (see Changing Type Sizes).
Note that the use of a ‘.ll
length’ request to initialize the line length, prior to use of the
‘TH’ macro, is supported for backward compatibility with some
versions of the man
program. Always use the
-rLL=length option, or an equivalent ‘.nr LL
length’ request, in preference to such a ‘.ll length’
request. In particular, note that in nroff mode, the request ‘.ll
65n’, (with any length expression that evaluates equal to
65n, i.e., the formatter’s default line length in nroff mode),
does not set the line length to 65n (it is adjusted to the
man
macro package’s default setting of 78n), whereas the
use of the -rLL=65n option, or the ‘.nr LL 65n’ request
does establish a line length of 65n.
Actually, only the title is required.
For an explanation what special characters are see Special Characters.
those that specify vertical or horizontal motion or a type size
Note that, for example, ‘!(-1)’ evaluates to
‘true’ because gtroff
treats both negative numbers and zero as
‘false’.
Plan 9’s troff
implementation also allows
tabs for argument separation – gtroff
intentionally doesn’t
support this.
The last solution, i.e., using escaped spaces,
is “classical” in the sense that it can be found in most troff
documents. Nevertheless, it is not optimal in all situations, since
‘\ ’ inserts a fixed-width, non-breaking space character that
can’t stretch. gtroff
provides a different command \~
to
insert a stretchable, non-breaking space.
Unfortunately, this is a lie. But
hopefully future gtroff
hackers will believe it :-)
Soft hyphen character is a misnomer since it is an output glyph.
Tab repetition character is a misnomer since it is an output glyph.
Leader repetition character is a misnomer since it is an output glyph.
Note
that a one-character symbol is not the same as an input character, i.e.,
the character a
is not the same as \[a]
. By default,
groff
defines only a single one-character symbol, \[-]
; it
is usually accessed as \-
. On the other hand, gtroff
has
the special feature that \[charXXX]
is the same as the
input character with character code XXX. For example,
\[char97]
is identical to the letter a
if ASCII
encoding is active.
\C
is actually a
misnomer since it accesses an output glyph.
Note that the output glyphs themselves don’t have such
properties. For gtroff
, a glyph is a numbered box with a given
width, depth, and height, nothing else. All manipulations with the
cflags
request work on the input level.
char
is a misnomer since an output glyph is
defined.
This is usually the parenthesis. Note that in most cases the real dimensions of the glyphs in a font are not related to its type size! For example, the standard POSTSCRIPT font families ‘Times Roman’, ‘Helvetica’, and ‘Courier’ can’t be used together at 10pt; to get acceptable output, the size of ‘Helvetica’ has to be reduced by one point, and the size of ‘Courier’ must be increased by one point.
The created output nodes must be identical. See Gtroff Internals.
The name of this conditional operator is a misnomer since it tests names of output glyphs.
While it is possible to define and call a macro ‘.’ with
.de . . tm foo .. . .. \" This calls macro `.'!
you can’t use this as the end-of-macro macro: during a macro definition, ‘..’ is never handled as a call to ‘.’, even if you say ‘.de foo .’ explicitly.
Margin character is a misnomer since it is an output glyph.
Except the
escapes \f
, \F
, \H
, \m
, \M
,
\R
, \s
, and \S
, which are processed immediately if
not in copy-in mode.
char
is a misnomer since it reports
missing glyphs – there aren’t missing input characters, only invalid
ones.
To be completely
independent of the current escape character, use \(rs
, which
represents a reverse solidus (backslash) glyph.
The parser and postprocessor for intermediate output can
be found in the file
groff-source-dir/src/libs/libdriver/input.cpp.
‘c’ is actually a misnomer since it outputs a glyph.
Plan 9 troff
has also abandoned the binary
format.
This keyword is misnamed since it starts a list of ordered glyphs, not characters.
The distinction between
input, characters, and output, glyphs, is not clearly separated in the
terminology of groff
; for example, the char
request should
be called glyph
since it defines an output entity.